No Description
You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

cm-help.en.txt 353KB

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394959697989910010110210310410510610710810911011111211311411511611711811912012112212312412512612712812913013113213313413513613713813914014114214314414514614714814915015115215315415515615715815916016116216316416516616716816917017117217317417517617717817918018118218318418518618718818919019119219319419519619719819920020120220320420520620720820921021121221321421521621721821922022122222322422522622722822923023123223323423523623723823924024124224324424524624724824925025125225325425525625725825926026126226326426526626726826927027127227327427527627727827928028128228328428528628728828929029129229329429529629729829930030130230330430530630730830931031131231331431531631731831932032132232332432532632732832933033133233333433533633733833934034134234334434534634734834935035135235335435535635735835936036136236336436536636736836937037137237337437537637737837938038138238338438538638738838939039139239339439539639739839940040140240340440540640740840941041141241341441541641741841942042142242342442542642742842943043143243343443543643743843944044144244344444544644744844945045145245345445545645745845946046146246346446546646746846947047147247347447547647747847948048148248348448548648748848949049149249349449549649749849950050150250350450550650750850951051151251351451551651751851952052152252352452552652752852953053153253353453553653753853954054154254354454554654754854955055155255355455555655755855956056156256356456556656756856957057157257357457557657757857958058158258358458558658758858959059159259359459559659759859960060160260360460560660760860961061161261361461561661761861962062162262362462562662762862963063163263363463563663763863964064164264364464564664764864965065165265365465565665765865966066166266366466566666766866967067167267367467567667767867968068168268368468568668768868969069169269369469569669769869970070170270370470570670770870971071171271371471571671771871972072172272372472572672772872973073173273373473573673773873974074174274374474574674774874975075175275375475575675775875976076176276376476576676776876977077177277377477577677777877978078178278378478578678778878979079179279379479579679779879980080180280380480580680780880981081181281381481581681781881982082182282382482582682782882983083183283383483583683783883984084184284384484584684784884985085185285385485585685785885986086186286386486586686786886987087187287387487587687787887988088188288388488588688788888989089189289389489589689789889990090190290390490590690790890991091191291391491591691791891992092192292392492592692792892993093193293393493593693793893994094194294394494594694794894995095195295395495595695795895996096196296396496596696796896997097197297397497597697797897998098198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040104110421043104410451046104710481049105010511052105310541055105610571058105910601061106210631064106510661067106810691070107110721073107410751076107710781079108010811082108310841085108610871088108910901091109210931094109510961097109810991100110111021103110411051106110711081109111011111112111311141115111611171118111911201121112211231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381139114011411142114311441145114611471148114911501151115211531154115511561157115811591160116111621163116411651166116711681169117011711172117311741175117611771178117911801181118211831184118511861187118811891190119111921193119411951196119711981199120012011202120312041205120612071208120912101211121212131214121512161217121812191220122112221223122412251226122712281229123012311232123312341235123612371238123912401241124212431244124512461247124812491250125112521253125412551256125712581259126012611262126312641265126612671268126912701271127212731274127512761277127812791280128112821283128412851286128712881289129012911292129312941295129612971298129913001301130213031304130513061307130813091310131113121313131413151316131713181319132013211322132313241325132613271328132913301331133213331334133513361337133813391340134113421343134413451346134713481349135013511352135313541355135613571358135913601361136213631364136513661367136813691370137113721373137413751376137713781379138013811382138313841385138613871388138913901391139213931394139513961397139813991400140114021403140414051406140714081409141014111412141314141415141614171418141914201421142214231424142514261427142814291430143114321433143414351436143714381439144014411442144314441445144614471448144914501451145214531454145514561457145814591460146114621463146414651466146714681469147014711472147314741475147614771478147914801481148214831484148514861487148814891490149114921493149414951496149714981499150015011502150315041505150615071508150915101511151215131514151515161517151815191520152115221523152415251526152715281529153015311532153315341535153615371538153915401541154215431544154515461547154815491550155115521553155415551556155715581559156015611562156315641565156615671568156915701571157215731574157515761577157815791580158115821583158415851586158715881589159015911592159315941595159615971598159916001601160216031604160516061607160816091610161116121613161416151616161716181619162016211622162316241625162616271628162916301631163216331634163516361637163816391640164116421643164416451646164716481649165016511652165316541655165616571658165916601661166216631664166516661667166816691670167116721673167416751676167716781679168016811682168316841685168616871688168916901691169216931694169516961697169816991700170117021703170417051706170717081709171017111712171317141715171617171718171917201721172217231724172517261727172817291730173117321733173417351736173717381739174017411742174317441745174617471748174917501751175217531754175517561757175817591760176117621763176417651766176717681769177017711772177317741775177617771778177917801781178217831784178517861787178817891790179117921793179417951796179717981799180018011802180318041805180618071808180918101811181218131814181518161817181818191820182118221823182418251826182718281829183018311832183318341835183618371838183918401841184218431844184518461847184818491850185118521853185418551856185718581859186018611862186318641865186618671868186918701871187218731874187518761877187818791880188118821883188418851886188718881889189018911892189318941895189618971898189919001901190219031904190519061907190819091910191119121913191419151916191719181919192019211922192319241925192619271928192919301931193219331934193519361937193819391940194119421943194419451946194719481949195019511952195319541955195619571958195919601961196219631964196519661967196819691970197119721973197419751976197719781979198019811982198319841985198619871988198919901991199219931994199519961997199819992000200120022003200420052006200720082009201020112012201320142015201620172018201920202021202220232024202520262027202820292030203120322033203420352036203720382039204020412042204320442045204620472048204920502051205220532054205520562057205820592060206120622063206420652066206720682069207020712072207320742075207620772078207920802081208220832084208520862087208820892090209120922093209420952096209720982099210021012102210321042105210621072108210921102111211221132114211521162117211821192120212121222123212421252126212721282129213021312132213321342135213621372138213921402141214221432144214521462147214821492150215121522153215421552156215721582159216021612162216321642165216621672168216921702171217221732174217521762177217821792180218121822183218421852186218721882189219021912192219321942195219621972198219922002201220222032204220522062207220822092210221122122213221422152216221722182219222022212222222322242225222622272228222922302231223222332234223522362237223822392240224122422243224422452246224722482249225022512252225322542255225622572258225922602261226222632264226522662267226822692270227122722273227422752276227722782279228022812282228322842285228622872288228922902291229222932294229522962297229822992300230123022303230423052306230723082309231023112312231323142315231623172318231923202321232223232324232523262327232823292330233123322333233423352336233723382339234023412342234323442345234623472348234923502351235223532354235523562357235823592360236123622363236423652366236723682369237023712372237323742375237623772378237923802381238223832384238523862387238823892390239123922393239423952396239723982399240024012402240324042405240624072408240924102411241224132414241524162417241824192420242124222423242424252426242724282429243024312432243324342435243624372438243924402441244224432444244524462447244824492450245124522453245424552456245724582459246024612462246324642465246624672468246924702471247224732474247524762477247824792480248124822483248424852486248724882489249024912492249324942495249624972498249925002501250225032504250525062507250825092510251125122513251425152516251725182519252025212522252325242525252625272528252925302531253225332534253525362537253825392540254125422543254425452546254725482549255025512552255325542555255625572558255925602561256225632564256525662567256825692570257125722573257425752576257725782579258025812582258325842585258625872588258925902591259225932594259525962597259825992600260126022603260426052606260726082609261026112612261326142615261626172618261926202621262226232624262526262627262826292630263126322633263426352636263726382639264026412642264326442645264626472648264926502651265226532654265526562657265826592660266126622663266426652666266726682669267026712672267326742675267626772678267926802681268226832684268526862687268826892690269126922693269426952696269726982699270027012702270327042705270627072708270927102711271227132714271527162717271827192720272127222723272427252726272727282729273027312732273327342735273627372738273927402741274227432744274527462747274827492750275127522753275427552756275727582759276027612762276327642765276627672768276927702771277227732774277527762777277827792780278127822783278427852786278727882789279027912792279327942795279627972798279928002801280228032804280528062807280828092810281128122813281428152816281728182819282028212822282328242825282628272828282928302831283228332834283528362837283828392840284128422843284428452846284728482849285028512852285328542855285628572858285928602861286228632864286528662867286828692870287128722873287428752876287728782879288028812882288328842885288628872888288928902891289228932894289528962897289828992900290129022903290429052906290729082909291029112912291329142915291629172918291929202921292229232924292529262927292829292930293129322933293429352936293729382939294029412942294329442945294629472948294929502951295229532954295529562957295829592960296129622963296429652966296729682969297029712972297329742975297629772978297929802981298229832984298529862987298829892990299129922993299429952996299729982999300030013002300330043005300630073008300930103011301230133014301530163017301830193020302130223023302430253026302730283029303030313032303330343035303630373038303930403041304230433044304530463047304830493050305130523053305430553056305730583059306030613062306330643065306630673068306930703071307230733074307530763077307830793080308130823083308430853086308730883089309030913092309330943095309630973098309931003101310231033104310531063107310831093110311131123113311431153116311731183119312031213122312331243125312631273128312931303131313231333134313531363137313831393140314131423143314431453146314731483149315031513152315331543155315631573158315931603161316231633164316531663167316831693170317131723173317431753176317731783179318031813182318331843185318631873188318931903191319231933194319531963197319831993200320132023203320432053206320732083209321032113212321332143215321632173218321932203221322232233224322532263227322832293230323132323233323432353236323732383239324032413242324332443245324632473248324932503251325232533254325532563257325832593260326132623263326432653266326732683269327032713272327332743275327632773278327932803281328232833284328532863287328832893290329132923293329432953296329732983299330033013302330333043305330633073308330933103311331233133314331533163317331833193320332133223323332433253326332733283329333033313332333333343335333633373338333933403341334233433344334533463347334833493350335133523353335433553356335733583359336033613362336333643365336633673368336933703371337233733374337533763377337833793380338133823383338433853386338733883389339033913392339333943395339633973398339934003401340234033404340534063407340834093410341134123413341434153416341734183419342034213422342334243425342634273428342934303431343234333434343534363437343834393440344134423443344434453446344734483449345034513452345334543455345634573458345934603461346234633464346534663467346834693470347134723473347434753476347734783479348034813482348334843485348634873488348934903491349234933494349534963497349834993500350135023503350435053506350735083509351035113512351335143515351635173518351935203521352235233524352535263527352835293530353135323533353435353536353735383539354035413542354335443545354635473548354935503551355235533554355535563557355835593560356135623563356435653566356735683569357035713572357335743575357635773578357935803581358235833584358535863587358835893590359135923593359435953596359735983599360036013602360336043605360636073608360936103611361236133614361536163617361836193620362136223623362436253626362736283629363036313632363336343635363636373638363936403641364236433644364536463647364836493650365136523653365436553656365736583659366036613662366336643665366636673668366936703671367236733674367536763677367836793680368136823683368436853686368736883689369036913692369336943695369636973698369937003701370237033704370537063707370837093710371137123713371437153716371737183719372037213722372337243725372637273728372937303731373237333734373537363737373837393740374137423743374437453746374737483749375037513752375337543755375637573758375937603761376237633764376537663767376837693770377137723773377437753776377737783779378037813782378337843785378637873788378937903791379237933794379537963797379837993800380138023803380438053806380738083809381038113812381338143815381638173818381938203821382238233824382538263827382838293830383138323833383438353836383738383839384038413842384338443845384638473848384938503851385238533854385538563857385838593860386138623863386438653866386738683869387038713872387338743875387638773878387938803881388238833884388538863887388838893890389138923893389438953896389738983899390039013902390339043905390639073908390939103911391239133914391539163917391839193920392139223923392439253926392739283929393039313932393339343935393639373938393939403941394239433944394539463947394839493950395139523953395439553956395739583959396039613962396339643965396639673968396939703971397239733974397539763977397839793980398139823983398439853986398739883989399039913992399339943995399639973998399940004001400240034004400540064007400840094010401140124013401440154016401740184019402040214022402340244025402640274028402940304031403240334034403540364037403840394040404140424043404440454046404740484049405040514052405340544055405640574058405940604061406240634064406540664067406840694070407140724073407440754076407740784079408040814082408340844085408640874088408940904091409240934094409540964097409840994100410141024103410441054106410741084109411041114112411341144115411641174118411941204121412241234124412541264127412841294130413141324133413441354136413741384139414041414142414341444145414641474148414941504151415241534154415541564157415841594160416141624163416441654166416741684169417041714172417341744175417641774178417941804181418241834184418541864187418841894190419141924193419441954196419741984199420042014202420342044205420642074208420942104211421242134214421542164217421842194220422142224223422442254226422742284229423042314232423342344235423642374238423942404241424242434244424542464247424842494250425142524253425442554256425742584259426042614262426342644265426642674268426942704271427242734274427542764277427842794280428142824283428442854286428742884289429042914292429342944295429642974298429943004301430243034304430543064307430843094310431143124313431443154316431743184319432043214322432343244325432643274328432943304331433243334334433543364337433843394340434143424343434443454346434743484349435043514352435343544355435643574358435943604361436243634364436543664367436843694370437143724373437443754376437743784379438043814382438343844385438643874388438943904391439243934394439543964397439843994400440144024403440444054406440744084409441044114412441344144415441644174418441944204421442244234424442544264427442844294430443144324433443444354436443744384439444044414442444344444445444644474448444944504451445244534454445544564457445844594460446144624463446444654466446744684469447044714472447344744475447644774478447944804481448244834484448544864487448844894490449144924493449444954496449744984499450045014502450345044505450645074508450945104511451245134514451545164517451845194520452145224523452445254526452745284529453045314532453345344535453645374538453945404541454245434544454545464547454845494550455145524553455445554556455745584559456045614562456345644565456645674568456945704571457245734574457545764577457845794580458145824583458445854586458745884589459045914592459345944595459645974598459946004601460246034604460546064607460846094610461146124613461446154616461746184619462046214622462346244625462646274628462946304631463246334634463546364637463846394640464146424643464446454646464746484649465046514652465346544655465646574658465946604661466246634664466546664667466846694670467146724673467446754676467746784679468046814682468346844685468646874688468946904691469246934694469546964697469846994700470147024703470447054706470747084709471047114712471347144715471647174718471947204721472247234724472547264727472847294730473147324733473447354736473747384739474047414742474347444745474647474748474947504751475247534754475547564757475847594760476147624763476447654766476747684769477047714772477347744775477647774778477947804781478247834784478547864787478847894790479147924793479447954796479747984799480048014802480348044805480648074808480948104811481248134814481548164817481848194820482148224823482448254826482748284829483048314832483348344835483648374838483948404841484248434844484548464847484848494850485148524853485448554856485748584859486048614862486348644865486648674868486948704871487248734874487548764877487848794880488148824883488448854886488748884889489048914892489348944895489648974898489949004901490249034904490549064907490849094910491149124913491449154916491749184919492049214922492349244925492649274928492949304931493249334934493549364937493849394940494149424943494449454946494749484949495049514952495349544955495649574958495949604961496249634964496549664967496849694970497149724973497449754976497749784979498049814982498349844985498649874988498949904991499249934994499549964997499849995000500150025003500450055006500750085009501050115012501350145015501650175018501950205021502250235024502550265027502850295030503150325033503450355036503750385039504050415042504350445045504650475048504950505051505250535054505550565057505850595060506150625063506450655066506750685069507050715072507350745075507650775078507950805081508250835084508550865087508850895090509150925093509450955096509750985099510051015102510351045105510651075108510951105111511251135114511551165117511851195120512151225123512451255126512751285129513051315132513351345135513651375138513951405141514251435144514551465147514851495150515151525153515451555156515751585159516051615162516351645165516651675168516951705171517251735174517551765177517851795180518151825183518451855186518751885189519051915192519351945195519651975198519952005201520252035204520552065207520852095210521152125213521452155216521752185219522052215222522352245225522652275228522952305231523252335234523552365237523852395240524152425243524452455246524752485249525052515252525352545255525652575258525952605261526252635264526552665267526852695270527152725273527452755276527752785279528052815282528352845285528652875288528952905291529252935294529552965297529852995300530153025303530453055306530753085309531053115312531353145315531653175318531953205321532253235324532553265327532853295330533153325333533453355336533753385339534053415342534353445345534653475348534953505351535253535354535553565357535853595360536153625363536453655366536753685369537053715372537353745375537653775378537953805381538253835384538553865387538853895390539153925393539453955396539753985399540054015402540354045405540654075408540954105411541254135414541554165417541854195420542154225423542454255426542754285429543054315432543354345435543654375438543954405441544254435444544554465447544854495450545154525453545454555456545754585459546054615462546354645465546654675468546954705471547254735474547554765477547854795480548154825483548454855486548754885489549054915492549354945495549654975498549955005501550255035504550555065507550855095510551155125513551455155516551755185519552055215522552355245525552655275528552955305531553255335534553555365537553855395540554155425543554455455546554755485549555055515552555355545555555655575558555955605561556255635564556555665567556855695570557155725573557455755576557755785579558055815582558355845585558655875588558955905591559255935594559555965597559855995600560156025603560456055606560756085609561056115612561356145615561656175618561956205621562256235624562556265627562856295630563156325633563456355636563756385639564056415642564356445645564656475648564956505651565256535654565556565657565856595660566156625663566456655666566756685669567056715672567356745675567656775678567956805681568256835684568556865687568856895690569156925693569456955696569756985699570057015702570357045705570657075708570957105711571257135714571557165717571857195720572157225723572457255726572757285729573057315732573357345735573657375738573957405741574257435744574557465747574857495750575157525753575457555756575757585759576057615762576357645765576657675768576957705771577257735774577557765777577857795780578157825783578457855786578757885789579057915792579357945795579657975798579958005801580258035804580558065807580858095810581158125813581458155816581758185819582058215822582358245825582658275828582958305831583258335834583558365837583858395840584158425843584458455846584758485849585058515852585358545855585658575858585958605861586258635864586558665867586858695870587158725873587458755876587758785879588058815882588358845885588658875888588958905891589258935894589558965897589858995900590159025903590459055906590759085909591059115912591359145915591659175918591959205921592259235924592559265927592859295930593159325933593459355936593759385939594059415942594359445945594659475948594959505951595259535954595559565957595859595960596159625963596459655966596759685969597059715972597359745975597659775978597959805981598259835984598559865987598859895990599159925993599459955996599759985999600060016002600360046005600660076008600960106011601260136014601560166017601860196020602160226023602460256026602760286029603060316032603360346035603660376038603960406041604260436044604560466047604860496050605160526053605460556056605760586059606060616062606360646065606660676068606960706071607260736074607560766077607860796080608160826083608460856086608760886089609060916092609360946095609660976098609961006101610261036104610561066107610861096110611161126113611461156116611761186119612061216122612361246125612661276128612961306131613261336134613561366137613861396140614161426143614461456146614761486149615061516152615361546155615661576158615961606161616261636164616561666167616861696170617161726173617461756176617761786179618061816182618361846185618661876188618961906191619261936194619561966197619861996200620162026203620462056206620762086209621062116212621362146215621662176218621962206221622262236224622562266227622862296230623162326233623462356236623762386239624062416242624362446245624662476248624962506251625262536254625562566257625862596260626162626263626462656266626762686269627062716272627362746275627662776278627962806281628262836284628562866287628862896290629162926293629462956296629762986299630063016302630363046305630663076308630963106311631263136314631563166317631863196320632163226323632463256326632763286329633063316332633363346335633663376338633963406341634263436344634563466347634863496350635163526353635463556356635763586359636063616362636363646365636663676368636963706371637263736374637563766377637863796380638163826383638463856386638763886389639063916392639363946395639663976398639964006401640264036404640564066407640864096410641164126413641464156416641764186419642064216422642364246425642664276428642964306431643264336434643564366437643864396440644164426443644464456446644764486449645064516452645364546455645664576458645964606461646264636464646564666467646864696470647164726473647464756476647764786479648064816482648364846485648664876488648964906491649264936494649564966497649864996500650165026503650465056506650765086509651065116512651365146515651665176518651965206521652265236524652565266527652865296530653165326533653465356536653765386539654065416542654365446545654665476548654965506551655265536554655565566557655865596560656165626563656465656566656765686569657065716572657365746575657665776578657965806581658265836584658565866587658865896590659165926593659465956596659765986599660066016602660366046605660666076608660966106611661266136614661566166617661866196620662166226623662466256626662766286629663066316632663366346635663666376638663966406641664266436644664566466647664866496650665166526653665466556656665766586659666066616662666366646665666666676668666966706671667266736674667566766677667866796680668166826683668466856686668766886689669066916692669366946695669666976698669967006701670267036704670567066707670867096710671167126713671467156716671767186719672067216722672367246725672667276728672967306731673267336734673567366737673867396740674167426743674467456746674767486749675067516752675367546755675667576758675967606761676267636764676567666767676867696770677167726773677467756776677767786779678067816782678367846785678667876788678967906791679267936794679567966797679867996800680168026803680468056806680768086809681068116812681368146815681668176818681968206821682268236824682568266827682868296830683168326833683468356836683768386839684068416842684368446845684668476848684968506851685268536854685568566857685868596860686168626863686468656866686768686869687068716872687368746875687668776878687968806881688268836884688568866887688868896890689168926893689468956896689768986899690069016902690369046905690669076908690969106911691269136914691569166917691869196920692169226923692469256926692769286929693069316932693369346935693669376938693969406941694269436944694569466947694869496950695169526953695469556956695769586959696069616962696369646965696669676968696969706971697269736974697569766977697869796980698169826983698469856986698769886989699069916992699369946995699669976998699970007001700270037004700570067007700870097010701170127013701470157016701770187019702070217022702370247025702670277028702970307031703270337034703570367037703870397040704170427043704470457046704770487049705070517052705370547055705670577058705970607061706270637064706570667067706870697070707170727073707470757076707770787079708070817082708370847085708670877088708970907091709270937094709570967097709870997100710171027103710471057106710771087109711071117112711371147115711671177118711971207121712271237124712571267127712871297130713171327133713471357136713771387139714071417142714371447145714671477148714971507151715271537154715571567157715871597160716171627163716471657166716771687169717071717172717371747175717671777178717971807181718271837184718571867187718871897190719171927193719471957196719771987199720072017202720372047205720672077208720972107211721272137214721572167217721872197220722172227223722472257226722772287229723072317232723372347235723672377238723972407241724272437244724572467247724872497250725172527253725472557256725772587259726072617262726372647265726672677268726972707271727272737274727572767277727872797280728172827283728472857286728772887289729072917292729372947295729672977298729973007301730273037304730573067307730873097310731173127313731473157316731773187319732073217322732373247325732673277328732973307331733273337334733573367337733873397340734173427343734473457346734773487349735073517352735373547355735673577358735973607361736273637364736573667367736873697370737173727373737473757376737773787379738073817382738373847385738673877388738973907391739273937394739573967397739873997400740174027403740474057406740774087409741074117412741374147415741674177418741974207421742274237424742574267427742874297430743174327433743474357436743774387439744074417442744374447445744674477448744974507451745274537454745574567457745874597460746174627463746474657466746774687469747074717472747374747475747674777478747974807481748274837484748574867487748874897490749174927493749474957496749774987499750075017502750375047505750675077508750975107511751275137514751575167517751875197520752175227523752475257526752775287529753075317532753375347535753675377538753975407541754275437544754575467547754875497550755175527553755475557556755775587559756075617562756375647565756675677568756975707571757275737574757575767577757875797580758175827583758475857586758775887589759075917592759375947595759675977598759976007601760276037604760576067607760876097610761176127613761476157616761776187619762076217622762376247625762676277628762976307631763276337634763576367637763876397640764176427643764476457646764776487649765076517652765376547655765676577658765976607661766276637664766576667667766876697670767176727673767476757676767776787679768076817682768376847685768676877688768976907691769276937694769576967697769876997700770177027703770477057706770777087709771077117712771377147715771677177718771977207721772277237724772577267727772877297730773177327733773477357736773777387739774077417742774377447745774677477748774977507751775277537754775577567757775877597760776177627763776477657766776777687769777077717772777377747775777677777778777977807781778277837784778577867787778877897790779177927793779477957796779777987799780078017802780378047805780678077808780978107811781278137814781578167817781878197820782178227823782478257826782778287829783078317832783378347835783678377838783978407841784278437844784578467847784878497850785178527853785478557856785778587859786078617862786378647865786678677868786978707871787278737874787578767877787878797880788178827883788478857886788778887889789078917892789378947895789678977898789979007901790279037904790579067907790879097910791179127913791479157916791779187919792079217922792379247925792679277928792979307931793279337934793579367937793879397940794179427943794479457946794779487949795079517952795379547955795679577958795979607961796279637964796579667967796879697970797179727973797479757976797779787979798079817982798379847985798679877988798979907991799279937994799579967997799879998000800180028003800480058006800780088009801080118012801380148015801680178018801980208021802280238024802580268027802880298030803180328033803480358036803780388039804080418042804380448045804680478048804980508051805280538054805580568057805880598060806180628063806480658066806780688069807080718072807380748075807680778078807980808081808280838084808580868087808880898090809180928093809480958096809780988099810081018102810381048105810681078108810981108111811281138114811581168117811881198120812181228123812481258126812781288129813081318132813381348135813681378138813981408141814281438144814581468147814881498150815181528153815481558156815781588159816081618162816381648165816681678168816981708171817281738174817581768177817881798180818181828183818481858186818781888189819081918192819381948195819681978198819982008201820282038204820582068207820882098210821182128213821482158216821782188219822082218222822382248225822682278228822982308231823282338234823582368237823882398240824182428243824482458246824782488249825082518252825382548255825682578258825982608261826282638264826582668267826882698270827182728273827482758276827782788279828082818282828382848285828682878288828982908291829282938294829582968297829882998300830183028303830483058306830783088309831083118312831383148315831683178318831983208321832283238324832583268327832883298330833183328333833483358336833783388339834083418342834383448345834683478348834983508351835283538354835583568357835883598360836183628363836483658366836783688369837083718372837383748375837683778378837983808381838283838384838583868387838883898390839183928393839483958396839783988399840084018402840384048405840684078408840984108411841284138414841584168417841884198420842184228423842484258426842784288429843084318432843384348435843684378438843984408441844284438444844584468447844884498450845184528453845484558456845784588459846084618462846384648465846684678468846984708471847284738474847584768477847884798480848184828483848484858486848784888489849084918492849384948495849684978498849985008501850285038504850585068507850885098510851185128513851485158516851785188519852085218522852385248525852685278528852985308531853285338534853585368537853885398540854185428543854485458546854785488549855085518552855385548555855685578558855985608561856285638564856585668567856885698570857185728573857485758576857785788579858085818582858385848585858685878588858985908591859285938594859585968597859885998600860186028603860486058606860786088609861086118612861386148615861686178618861986208621862286238624862586268627862886298630863186328633863486358636863786388639864086418642864386448645864686478648864986508651865286538654865586568657865886598660866186628663866486658666866786688669867086718672867386748675867686778678867986808681868286838684868586868687868886898690869186928693869486958696869786988699870087018702870387048705870687078708870987108711871287138714871587168717871887198720872187228723872487258726872787288729873087318732873387348735873687378738873987408741874287438744874587468747874887498750875187528753875487558756875787588759876087618762876387648765876687678768876987708771877287738774877587768777877887798780878187828783878487858786878787888789879087918792879387948795879687978798879988008801880288038804880588068807880888098810881188128813881488158816881788188819882088218822882388248825882688278828882988308831883288338834883588368837883888398840884188428843884488458846884788488849885088518852885388548855885688578858885988608861886288638864886588668867886888698870887188728873887488758876887788788879888088818882888388848885888688878888888988908891889288938894889588968897889888998900890189028903890489058906890789088909891089118912891389148915891689178918891989208921892289238924892589268927892889298930893189328933893489358936893789388939894089418942894389448945894689478948894989508951895289538954895589568957895889598960896189628963896489658966896789688969897089718972897389748975897689778978897989808981898289838984898589868987898889898990899189928993899489958996899789988999900090019002900390049005900690079008900990109011901290139014901590169017901890199020902190229023902490259026902790289029903090319032903390349035903690379038903990409041904290439044904590469047904890499050905190529053905490559056905790589059906090619062906390649065906690679068906990709071907290739074907590769077907890799080908190829083908490859086908790889089909090919092909390949095909690979098909991009101910291039104910591069107910891099110911191129113911491159116
  1. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACL ==
  2. Sets permissions on an object.
  3. == CMD_USAGE_ACL ==
  4. Usage:
  5. cm ^acl (--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
  6. (-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]
  7. <objectspec>
  8. Options:
  9. --^user User name.
  10. --^group Group name.
  11. -^allowed Enables the specified permission or permissions. Use a
  12. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  13. to display all the available permissions.)
  14. -^denied Denies the specified permission or permission. Use a
  15. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  16. to display all the available permissions.)
  17. -^overrideallowed Overrides the allowed permission or permissions. Use a
  18. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  19. to display all the available permissions.)
  20. -^overridedenied Overrides the denied permission or permissions. Use a
  21. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  22. to display all the available permissions.)
  23. objectspec The object whose permissions will be set.
  24. The valid objects for this command are:
  25. repserver, repository, branch, label, and attribute.
  26. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  27. Special usage for secured paths:
  28. cm ^acl [(--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
  29. (-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]]
  30. [--^delete] [--^branches=[+ | -]<branch>[,...]]
  31. <spec>
  32. --^delete Removes a secured path.
  33. See Remarks for more info.
  34. --^branches Sets the secured path permissions to a group of branches.
  35. Use a comma to separate branches.
  36. Optionally, each branch can be preceded by the + or -
  37. sign to specify whether a branch must be added or deleted
  38. to the list when editing.
  39. See Remarks for more info.
  40. spec The secured path where to set the permissions.
  41. == CMD_HELP_ACL ==
  42. Configuring permissions requires understanding how Unity VCS security works.
  43. Check the Security Guide to learn how permissions work:
  44. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/securityguide
  45. Remarks:
  46. This command sets permissions for a user or group on the specified objects,
  47. repositories, branches, labels and/or server paths.
  48. Object specs:
  49. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify objects.)
  50. The '^acl' command uses a special type of spec: secured paths.
  51. Secured paths specs: ^path:server_path[#tag]
  52. Examples:
  53. - ^path:/src/foo.c
  54. - ^path:/doc/pdf
  55. - ^path:/doc/pdf#documents
  56. Permission action:
  57. Use -^allowed and -^denied to specify what permissions to set.
  58. Use -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied arguments to specify what
  59. permissions to override.
  60. Each action requires a permission list separated by commas.
  61. Permission names:
  62. Each permission name is preceded by + or - symbol.
  63. The + symbol sets the permission and the - symbol clears it.
  64. To see the permissions of an object, use the 'cm ^showacl' command.
  65. Overridden permissions:
  66. Overriding a permission using -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied
  67. allows you to bypass inheritance.
  68. It is helpful to bypass permissions set at the repository or server
  69. level.
  70. Example:
  71. cm ^acl --^user=vio -^allowed=+^ci -^overrideallowed=+^ci ^br:qa@test
  72. (Allows user 'vio' to checkin on the branch 'qa' on repo 'test'
  73. even if she has the permission denied at the repo level.)
  74. Server path permissions (a.k.a. secured paths):
  75. - It is possible to specify permissions for a given server path.
  76. - These permissions are checked during the checkin operation.
  77. - These permissions can also be checked during the update operation,
  78. and can be used as a way to prevent certain directories and files to
  79. be downloaded to the workspace.
  80. - For every item to checkin, the server tries to match the item path
  81. with a secured path. If it matches, the checkin operation checks
  82. whether the item has permissions to be checked in.
  83. The permissions that can be defined for a secured path are the
  84. following:
  85. '^ci', '^change', '^add', '^move', '^rm', '^read'
  86. If the permissions check is not successful for any of the involved
  87. items, the checkin operation will be rolled back.
  88. To set secured path permissions to a group of branches, use the
  89. --^branches option.
  90. Example:
  91. cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^ci ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=main,main/rel0
  92. To edit the ACL associated to the secured path, the tag is useful.
  93. Example:
  94. cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^rm ^path:/src#rule0
  95. (Without the tag, the list of branches would need to be specified
  96. again.)
  97. The list of branches of the secured path can be edited.
  98. Example:
  99. cm ^acl ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=-main,+main/rel1
  100. (Removes 'main' from the list and adds 'main/rel1'.)
  101. To remove a secured path, use the --^delete argument.
  102. Example:
  103. cm ^acl --^user=jo --^delete ^path:/src#rule0
  104. Inheritance:
  105. Inheritance is an option that comes from the days of Plastic SCM 3.0.
  106. It is advanced, but almost deprecated.
  107. It lets an object inherit its permissions from any other object,
  108. overriding the default inheritance relationships.
  109. Use the option -^cut to cut the inheritance chain.
  110. Use the option -^cutncpy to cut and copy the current inherited
  111. permissions. (This is inspired on the Windows filesystem permissions
  112. where you can cut inheritance but retain the actual permissions.)
  113. The -^inherit option allows the user to inherit from an object spec.
  114. Example: '-^inherit=object_spec'
  115. Examples:
  116. cm ^acl --^user=danipen -^denied=+^ci ^rep:core
  117. (Denies checkin for user 'danipen' on repo 'core'.)
  118. cm ^acl --^group=developers -^allowed=+^view,-^read -^denied=+^chgperm ^br:main
  119. (The command grants view permission, clears read permission,
  120. and denies chgperm permission to 'developers' group in 'main' branch.)
  121. Secured path examples:
  122. cm ^acl --^group=devs -^denied=+^ci ^path:/server#rel --^branches=main,main/2.0
  123. (The command denies the checkin permission to 'devs' group for any path
  124. that matches '/server' in the branches 'main' and 'main/2.0'. The tag '#rel'
  125. is created to be able to refer to it later.)
  126. cm ^acl ^path:/server#rel --^branches=-/main,+/main/Rel2.1
  127. (Updates the secured path '/server' whose tag is 'rel', removing the
  128. 'main' branch and adding the branch 'main/Rel2.1' to the branch
  129. group the secured path applies to. Considering the previous example,
  130. now the branches list will contain 'main/Rel2.1' and 'main/2.0'.)
  131. cm ^acl --^user=vsanchezm -^allowed=-^read -^overrideallowed=+^read ^path:/doc
  132. (Removes '^read' permission to 'vsanchezm' overriding it in '/doc' path.)
  133. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  134. Activates a licensed user.
  135. == CMD_USAGE_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  136. Usage:
  137. cm ^activateuser | ^au <user-name>[ ...] [--^server=<rep-server-spec>]
  138. Options:
  139. --^server=<rep-server-spec> Activates the user in the specified server.
  140. If no server is specified, executes the command
  141. in the default server in the client.conf file.
  142. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  143. repserver specs.)
  144. user-name The user name or user names to activate. Use double quotes (" ")
  145. to specify user names containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  146. separate user names.
  147. == CMD_HELP_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  148. Remarks:
  149. To activate a user, it must have been previously deactivated.
  150. By default, a user is activated the first time they perform a write
  151. operation in Unity VCS. The user is automatically activated only if
  152. the maximum number of users has not been exceeded.
  153. (See the 'cm ^help ^deactivateuser' command for more information about
  154. deactivating Unity VCS users.)
  155. Examples:
  156. cm ^activateuser john
  157. cm ^activateuser david "mary collins"
  158. cm ^au peter --^server=localhost:8087
  159. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADD ==
  160. Adds an item to version control.
  161. == CMD_USAGE_ADD ==
  162. Usage:
  163. cm ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  164. [--^skipcontentcheck] [--^coparent] [--^filetypes=<file>] [--^noinfo]
  165. [--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
  166. <item-path>[ ...]
  167. Options:
  168. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Adds items recursively.
  169. --^silent Does not show any output.
  170. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
  171. continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
  172. added, its content is not added.
  173. --^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
  174. text or binary, it will be set as binary instead of
  175. checking the content to detect the type. This is done
  176. to increase performance on huge checkins.
  177. --^coparent Runs a checkout of the parent of the item being added.
  178. --^filetypes The filetypes file to use. Check the following link for
  179. more information:
  180. http://blog.plasticscm.com/2008/03/custom-file-types.html
  181. --^noinfo Doesn't print progress information.
  182. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
  183. the examples for more information.
  184. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  185. format. Check the examples for more information.
  186. item-path The item or items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  187. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate items.
  188. Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
  189. == CMD_HELP_ADD ==
  190. Remarks:
  191. Requirements to add items:
  192. - The parent directory of the item to add must have been previously added.
  193. Reading input from stdin:
  194. The '^add' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single dash
  195. "-".
  196. Example:
  197. cm ^add -
  198. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  199. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to add.
  200. Example:
  201. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^add -
  202. (In Windows, adds all .c files in the workspace.)
  203. Examples:
  204. cm ^add file1.txt file2.txt
  205. (Adds 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' items.)
  206. cm ^add c:\workspace\file.txt
  207. (Adds 'file.txt' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
  208. cm ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
  209. (Recursively adds 'src'.)
  210. cm ^add -^R *
  211. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
  212. cm ^add -^R * --^filetypes=filetypes.conf
  213. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, using
  214. 'filetypes.conf' to assign a type to each file based on its extension,
  215. instead of checking its content.)
  216. cm ^add --^coparent c:\workspace\dir\file.txt
  217. (Adds 'file.txt' to source control, and performs a checkout of 'dir'.)
  218. cm ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
  219. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
  220. '^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
  221. could not be added.)
  222. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN ==
  223. Executes administrative commands on the server.
  224. == CMD_USAGE_ADMIN ==
  225. Usage:
  226. cm ^admin <command> [options]
  227. Commands:
  228. - ^readonly
  229. To get more information about each command run:
  230. cm ^admin <command> --^usage
  231. cm ^admin <command> --^help
  232. == CMD_HELP_ADMIN ==
  233. Remarks:
  234. Only the server administrator can execute administrative commands.
  235. Examples:
  236. cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter
  237. cm ^admin ^readonly ^status
  238. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  239. Enables/disables the server readonly mode.
  240. == CMD_USAGE_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  241. Usage:
  242. cm ^admin ^readonly (^enter | ^leave | ^status) [<server>]
  243. Options:
  244. ^enter The server enters read-only mode. Write operations will be rejected.
  245. ^leave The server leaves read-only mode.
  246. ^status Shows the server read-only mode status.
  247. server Executes the command in the specified server (server:port). (Use
  248. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server specs.)
  249. If no server is specified, the command works with the server of the
  250. current workspace.
  251. If the current path is not in a workspace, the command works with
  252. the default server defined in the client.conf config file.
  253. == CMD_HELP_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  254. Remarks:
  255. Only the server administrator can enter the server readonly mode.
  256. Examples:
  257. cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter diana:8086
  258. cm ^admin ^readonly ^leave
  259. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ANNOTATE ==
  260. Shows the changeset where each line of a file was last modified and its author.
  261. == CMD_USAGE_ANNOTATE ==
  262. Usage:
  263. cm ^annotate | ^blame <spec>[ ...]
  264. [--^format=<str_format>]
  265. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces
  266. | ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  267. [--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
  268. [--^encoding=<name>]
  269. [--^stats]
  270. [--^repository=<repspec>]
  271. Options:
  272. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  273. Remarks for more info.
  274. --^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
  275. --^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
  276. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  277. See the MSDN documentation at
  278. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  279. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  280. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  281. --^stats Shows statistics information.
  282. --^repository Specifies a repository spec used to calculate
  283. the annotations. By default, this command uses the
  284. repository where the loaded revision repository in the
  285. workspace is stored. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  286. more about repspecs.)
  287. spec The spec of the file to annotate.
  288. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  289. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  290. == CMD_HELP_ANNOTATE ==
  291. Remarks:
  292. Binary files can't be annotated.
  293. Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
  294. - ^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
  295. - ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
  296. - ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
  297. - ^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
  298. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  299. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  300. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  301. - {^owner} User who changed the line the last time.
  302. - {^rev} Source revision specification of the line.
  303. - {^content} Line content.
  304. - {^date} Date when the line was checked in.
  305. - {^comment} Comment of the source revision of the line.
  306. - {^changeset} Changeset of the source revision of the line.
  307. - {^line} Line number of the file.
  308. - {^id} Item id.
  309. - {^parentid} Parent id of the item.
  310. - {^rep} Repository of the item.
  311. - {^branch} Branch of the source revision of the line.
  312. - {^ismergerev} Whether the revision of the line was created in a merge.
  313. Date format parameters (--^dateformat):
  314. To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
  315. See the supported formats specified at:
  316. https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
  317. Repository specification (--^repository):
  318. To retrieve data from a remote repository. Useful for distributed
  319. scenarios.
  320. Examples:
  321. cm ^blame c:\workspace\src --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeolandwhitespaces --^encoding=utf-8
  322. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
  323. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner} {^date, 10} {^content}"
  324. (Writes the owner field, then a blank, then the date field (aligned to
  325. right), then a blank, and the content.)
  326. cm ^blame c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner, -7} {^comment} {^date}" \
  327. --^dateformat=yyyyMMdd
  328. (Writes the owner field in 7 spaces (aligned to the left) followed by
  329. a blank, then the comment, followed by another blank, and ending with the
  330. formatted date (for example, 20170329).)
  331. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^repository=centralRep@myserver:8084
  332. cm ^blame ^serverpath:/src/client/checkin/Checkin.cs#^cs:73666
  333. (Annotates the file starting in changeset 73666 using a server path.)
  334. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_APPLYLOCAL ==
  335. Checks for local changes (locally moved, locally deleted, and locally changed)
  336. and applies them, so that Unity VCS starts tracking those changes.
  337. == CMD_USAGE_APPLYLOCAL ==
  338. Usage:
  339. cm ^applylocal | ^al [--^dependencies] [<item_path>[ ...]]
  340. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  341. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  342. Options:
  343. --^dependencies Adds local change dependencies into the items to
  344. apply.
  345. item_path Items to be applied. Use a whitespace to separate
  346. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  347. containing spaces.
  348. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  349. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  350. the lines should start.
  351. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  352. the lines should end.
  353. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  354. the fields should be separated.
  355. == CMD_HELP_APPLYLOCAL ==
  356. Remarks:
  357. - If --^dependencies and <item_path> are not specified, the operation involves
  358. all the local changes in the workspace.
  359. - It is always applied recursively from the given path.
  360. Examples:
  361. cm ^applylocal foo.c bar.c
  362. cm ^applylocal .
  363. (Applies all local changes in the current directory.)
  364. cm ^applylocal
  365. (Applies all local changes in the workspace.)
  366. cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable
  367. (Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
  368. simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
  369. cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
  370. --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  371. (Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
  372. simplified, easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines and
  373. separating the fields with the specified strings.)
  374. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ARCHIVE ==
  375. Archives data in external storage.
  376. == CMD_USAGE_ARCHIVE ==
  377. Usage:
  378. cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] [-^c=<str_comment>]
  379. [--^file=<base_file>]
  380. (Extracts data from the repository and stores it on external storage.)
  381. cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] --^restore
  382. (Restores previously archived revisions back into the repository.)
  383. Options:
  384. -^c Sets a comment in the archive storage files to create.
  385. --^file Name prefix and (optional) path for the new archive
  386. data files.
  387. --^restore Restores previously archived data from generated archive
  388. files. The external storage location and the
  389. externaldata.conf file must be available at the moment
  390. of the revision restoration. See Remarks for more
  391. information.
  392. revspec One or more revision specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  393. to learn more about revspecs.)
  394. == CMD_HELP_ARCHIVE ==
  395. Remarks:
  396. This command extracts data from the repository database and store it on
  397. external storage, saving database space.
  398. The command can also restore (--^restore) previously archived revisions back
  399. into the repository database.
  400. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify a revspec.
  401. The user running this command must be the Unity VCS server administrator
  402. (repository server owner) to be allowed to complete the operation.
  403. Every data segment from the specified revisions will be stored in a
  404. different file, with a name starting with the value defined by the --^file
  405. argument. This argument can contain either a full path value including a
  406. prefix for future archive files or just this prefix value.
  407. Once archived, the data from the specified revisions will be accessible in
  408. two ways:
  409. 1. From the client: The client will detect if the data was archived and it
  410. will prompt the user to enter the location of the files.
  411. Users can configure the external data location by creating a file named
  412. externaldata.conf (at the standard configuration files locations, using
  413. the same rules that apply for the client.conf file) containing the paths
  414. where archived data have been located.
  415. 2. From the server: This way users won't have to know whether the data was
  416. archived or not, since requests will be transparently resolved by the
  417. server. To do so, the administrator will create a file called
  418. externaldata.conf in the server directory and will fill it with the
  419. paths where the archived volumes are.
  420. To unarchive (restore) a revision (or set of revisions), the archived
  421. files must be accessible from the client. Hence, it is not possible to
  422. unarchive data being resolved by the server (method 2) because the client
  423. will not be able to identify it as archived.
  424. If method 2 is used, to unarchive successfully, the administrator will have
  425. to edit the externaldata.conf server file first to remove access to the
  426. archived files which have to be unarchived.
  427. Archive example:
  428. 1) Archive one revision:
  429. cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^file=/Users/ruben/archive/battle
  430. 2) See the archived revision in the specified output path:
  431. ^ls -^al /Users/ruben/archive/battle*
  432. -rw-r--r-- 1 ruben staff 2220039 Nov 9 10:52 /Users/ruben/archive/battle-100280-167
  433. Unarchive (restore) example:
  434. 1) Add the output archive folder to the externaldata.conf file:
  435. ^vi /Users/ruben/.plastic4/externaldata.conf
  436. /Users/ruben/archive
  437. 2) Unarchive the revision:
  438. cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^restore
  439. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  440. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  441. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  442. you to specify the comment.
  443. Reading input from stdin:
  444. The '^archive' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  445. dash "-".
  446. Example: cm ^archive -
  447. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  448. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to archive.
  449. Example:
  450. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^archive -
  451. (In Windows, archives all .c files in the workspace.)
  452. Examples:
  453. cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main
  454. (Archives the last revision of 'bigfile.zip' in branch 'main'.)
  455. cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main --^restore
  456. (Restores the archived revision.)
  457. cm ^archive ^rev:myfile.pdf#^cs:2 -^c="big pdf file" --^file=c:\arch_files\arch
  458. (Archives the revision with changeset 2 of myfile.pdf in 'c:\archived_files'
  459. folder. The archived file name will start with 'arch' (for example, arch_11_56).)
  460. cm ^find "^revs ^where ^size > 26214400" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}" \
  461. --^nototal | cm ^archive -^c="volume00" --^file="volume00" -
  462. (Archives all the files bigger than 25Mb on files starting with name
  463. 'volume00'.)
  464. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE ==
  465. Allows the user to manage attributes.
  466. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE ==
  467. Usage:
  468. cm ^attribute | ^att <command> [options]
  469. Commands:
  470. - ^create | ^mk
  471. - ^delete | ^rm
  472. - ^set
  473. - ^unset
  474. - ^rename
  475. - ^edit
  476. To get more information about each command run:
  477. cm ^attribute <command> --^usage
  478. cm ^attribute <command> --^help
  479. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE ==
  480. Examples:
  481. cm ^attribute ^create status
  482. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
  483. cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
  484. cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
  485. cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status "buildStatus"
  486. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of the task in the CI pipeline"
  487. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGELIST ==
  488. Groups pending changes in changelists.
  489. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGELIST ==
  490. Usage:
  491. cm ^changelist | ^clist [--^symlink]
  492. (Displays all changelists.)
  493. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^create <clist_name>
  494. [<clist_desc>] [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
  495. (Creates a changelist.)
  496. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^delete <clist_name> [--^symlink]
  497. (Deletes the selected changelist. If this changelist contains pending
  498. changes, then these will be moved to the ^default changelist.)
  499. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^edit <clist_name> [<action_name> <action_value>]
  500. [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
  501. (Edits the selected changelist.)
  502. cm ^changelist | ^clist <clist_name> (^add | ^rm) <path_name>[ ...]
  503. [--^symlink]
  504. (Edits the selected changelist by adding ('^add') or removing ('^rm') the
  505. change(s) that match with the given path_name(s). Use a whitespace to
  506. separate path_names. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  507. spaces. The status of the paths must be '^Added' or '^Checked-out'.)
  508. Options:
  509. clist_name The name of the changelist. A path to a file containing
  510. the name can be used instead. More info at --^namefile.
  511. clist_desc The description of the changelist. A path to a file
  512. containing the description can be used instead. More
  513. info at --^descriptionfile.
  514. action_name Choose between '^rename' or '^description' to edit the
  515. changelist.
  516. action_value Applies the new name or new description when editing
  517. the changelist.
  518. --^persistent The changelist will remain in the workspace even if its
  519. contents are checked-in or reverted.
  520. --^notpersistent (Default) The changelist will not remain in the
  521. workspace even if its contents are checked-in or
  522. reverted.
  523. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  524. target.
  525. --^namefile A valid path to a file containing the name of the
  526. changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist and its
  527. content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
  528. --^newnamefile A valid path to a file containing the new name of the
  529. changelist when renaming. Bear in mind the file must exist
  530. and its content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
  531. --^descriptionfile A valid path to a file containing the description for the
  532. changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist.
  533. == CMD_HELP_CHANGELIST ==
  534. Remarks:
  535. The '^changelist' command handles both the workspace pending changelists and
  536. the changes contained in a changelist.
  537. Examples:
  538. cm ^changelist
  539. (Shows the current workspace changelists.)
  540. cm ^changelist ^create config_changes "dotConf files" --^persistent
  541. (Creates a new changelist named 'config_changes' and description 'dotConf
  542. files' which will remain persistent in the current workspace once the
  543. pending changelist is either checked-in or reverted.)
  544. cm ^changelist ^create --^namefile="name.txt" --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
  545. (Creates a new changelist which name and description are both taken from files.)
  546. cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes ^rename config_files --^notpersistent
  547. (Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' and renames it to
  548. 'config_files'. Also, it turns the changelist into "not persistent".)
  549. cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes --^notpersistent
  550. (Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' by turning it into "not persistent".)
  551. cm ^changelist ^delete config_files
  552. (Removes the pending changelist 'config_files' from the current workspace.)
  553. cm ^changelist ^delete --namefile="name.txt"
  554. (Removes the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file from the current
  555. workspace.)
  556. cm ^changelist config_files ^add foo.conf
  557. (Adds the file 'foo.conf' to the 'config_files' changelist.)
  558. cm ^changelist config_files ^rm foo.conf readme.txt
  559. (Removes the files 'foo.conf' and 'readme.txt' from the 'config_files'
  560. changelist and moves the files to the system default changelist.)
  561. cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^description --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
  562. (Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, changing its
  563. description to the text content of the 'desc.txt' file.)
  564. cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^rename --^newnamefile="newname.txt"
  565. (Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, renaming it to
  566. the text content of the 'newname.txt' file.)
  567. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET ==
  568. Executes advanced operations on changesets.
  569. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET ==
  570. Usage:
  571. cm ^changeset <command> [options]
  572. Commands:
  573. - ^move | ^mv
  574. - ^delete | ^rm
  575. - ^editcomment | ^edit
  576. To get more information about each command run:
  577. cm ^changeset <command> --^usage
  578. cm ^changeset <command> --^help
  579. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET ==
  580. Examples:
  581. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
  582. cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:2b55f8aa-0b29-410f-b99c-60e573a309ca@devData
  583. cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
  584. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
  585. Modifies the comment of a changeset.
  586. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
  587. Usage:
  588. cm ^changeset ^editcomment | ^edit <csetspec> <new_comment>
  589. Options:
  590. csetspec The target changeset whose comment will be edited.
  591. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  592. specs.)
  593. new_comment The new comment that will be added to the targeted
  594. changeset.
  595. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
  596. Remarks:
  597. - The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
  598. Examples:
  599. cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
  600. cm ^changeset ^edit ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a \
  601. "This comment text will replace the previous one."
  602. cm ^changeset ^edit "89095131-895d-4173-9440-ff9ef9b2538d@project@cloud" \
  603. "Changing my comment"
  604. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  605. Moves a changeset and all its descendants to a different branch.
  606. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  607. Usage:
  608. cm ^changeset ^move | ^mv <csetspec> <branchspec>
  609. Options:
  610. csetspec First changeset to be moved to a different branch. All
  611. descendant changesets in the same branch will be
  612. targeted by the command as well.
  613. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  614. specs.)
  615. branchspec The target branch where the targeted changesets are
  616. stored. It needs to be empty or non-existing; if the
  617. destination branch doesn't exist, it will be created by
  618. the command.
  619. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
  620. specs.)
  621. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  622. Remarks:
  623. - The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
  624. - The destination branch must be either empty or non-existing.
  625. - If the destination branch doesn't exist, it will created.
  626. - Merge links will be kept unchanged since branches don't affect them.
  627. Examples:
  628. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
  629. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a ^br:/hotfix/TL-352
  630. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  631. Deletes a changeset from the repository.
  632. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  633. Usage:
  634. cm ^changeset ^delete | ^rm <csetspec>
  635. Options:
  636. csetspec The target changeset to be removed. It must fulfill
  637. some specific conditions. See Remarks for more info.
  638. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  639. specs.)
  640. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  641. Remarks:
  642. - The target changeset must be the last in its branch.
  643. - The target changeset cannot be the parent of any other changeset.
  644. - The target changeset cannot be neither the source of a merge link nor
  645. part of an interval merge as source.
  646. - No label must be applied to the target changeset.
  647. - The target changeset must not be the root changeset ('^cs:0').
  648. Examples:
  649. cm ^changeset ^rm ^cs:4525@myrepo@myserver
  650. cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a
  651. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  652. Changes the user's password (UP).
  653. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  654. Usage:
  655. cm ^changepassword | ^passwd
  656. == CMD_HELP_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  657. Remarks:
  658. This command is only available when the security configuration is UP
  659. (user/password).
  660. See the Administrator Guide for more information:
  661. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
  662. The old and new passwords are required.
  663. Examples:
  664. cm ^passwd
  665. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  666. Checks the connection to the server.
  667. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  668. Usage:
  669. cm ^checkconnection | ^cc
  670. == CMD_HELP_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  671. Remarks:
  672. - This command returns a message indicating whether there is a valid
  673. connection to the configured Unity VCS server.
  674. - The command checks checks the version compatibility with the server.
  675. - The command also checks whether the configured user is valid or not.
  676. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKDB ==
  677. > **This command is deprecated.**
  678. Checks the repositories integrity.
  679. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKDB ==
  680. Usage:
  681. cm ^checkdatabase | ^chkdb [<repserverspec> | <repspec>]
  682. Options:
  683. repserverspec Repositories server.
  684. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
  685. specs.)
  686. repspec Repository.
  687. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  688. == CMD_HELP_CHECKDB ==
  689. Remarks:
  690. - If neither repserverspec nor repspec are specified, the check will be
  691. performed in the server specified in the client.conf file.
  692. Examples:
  693. cm ^checkdatabase ^repserver:localhost:8084
  694. cm ^chkdb ^rep:default@localhost:8084
  695. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKIN ==
  696. Stores changes in the repository.
  697. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKIN ==
  698. Usage:
  699. cm ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
  700. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  701. [--^all|-^a] [--^applychanged] [--^private] [--^update] [--^symlink]
  702. [--^noshowchangeset]
  703. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  704. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  705. Options:
  706. item_path Items to be checked-in. Use double quotes (" ") to
  707. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  708. separate item paths.
  709. Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
  710. -^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset created
  711. in the checkin operation.
  712. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  713. changeset created in the checkin operation.
  714. --^all | -^a The items changed, moved and deleted locally on the
  715. given paths are also included.
  716. --^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
  717. detected in the workspace along with the checked out
  718. items.
  719. --^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
  720. included.
  721. --^update Processes the update-merge automatically if it
  722. eventually happens.
  723. --^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not
  724. to the target.
  725. --^noshowchangeset Doesn't print the result changeset.
  726. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  727. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  728. the lines should start.
  729. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  730. the lines should end.
  731. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  732. the fields should be separated.
  733. == CMD_HELP_CHECKIN ==
  734. Remarks:
  735. - If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin involves all the
  736. pending changes in the workspace.
  737. - The checkin operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
  738. - To checkin an item:
  739. - The item must be under source code control.
  740. - If the item is private (not under source code control), the --^private
  741. flag is necessary in order to checkin it.
  742. - The item must be checked out.
  743. - If the item is changed but not checked out, the --^applychanged flag
  744. is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
  745. wildcards ('*').
  746. Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
  747. checked in.
  748. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  749. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  750. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  751. you to specify the comment.
  752. Reading input from stdin:
  753. The '^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  754. dash "-".
  755. Example: cm ^checkin -
  756. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  757. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
  758. Example:
  759. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkin --^all -
  760. (In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
  761. Examples:
  762. cm ^checkin file1.txt file2.txt
  763. (Checkins the 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' checked-out files.)
  764. cm ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
  765. (Checkins the current directory and sets the comment in the
  766. 'mycomment.txt' file.)
  767. cm ^checkin link --^symlink
  768. (Checkins the symlink file and not the target.)
  769. cm ^ci file1.txt -^c="my comment"
  770. (Checkins 'file1.txt' and includes a comment.)
  771. cm ^status --^short --^compact --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
  772. (Lists the paths in the changelist named 'pending_to_review' and redirects
  773. this list to the input of the checkin command.)
  774. cm ^ci . --^machinereadable
  775. (Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  776. easier-to-parse format.)
  777. cm ^ci . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  778. (Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  779. easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
  780. separating the fields with the specified strings.)
  781. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKOUT ==
  782. Marks files as ready to modify.
  783. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKOUT ==
  784. Usage:
  785. cm ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  786. [--^format=<str_format>]
  787. [--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
  788. [--^silent] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
  789. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  790. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  791. Options:
  792. item_path Items to be checked-out. Use double quotes (" ") to
  793. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  794. separate item paths.
  795. Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
  796. -^R Checks out files recursively.
  797. --^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
  798. format. Check the examples for more information.
  799. --^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
  800. format. Check the examples for more information.
  801. --^silent Does not show any output at all.
  802. --^symlink Applies the checkout operation to the symlink and not
  803. to the target.
  804. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
  805. cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
  806. continue without it.
  807. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  808. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  809. the lines should start.
  810. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  811. the lines should end.
  812. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  813. the fields should be separated.
  814. == CMD_HELP_CHECKOUT ==
  815. Remarks:
  816. To checkout an item:
  817. - The item must be under source code control.
  818. - The item must be checked-in.
  819. If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
  820. a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
  821. and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
  822. simultaneously checkout.
  823. You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
  824. See the Administrator Guide for more information:
  825. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
  826. The format string replaces the placeholder '{0}' with the path of the item
  827. being checked out. Check the examples to see how to use it.
  828. Reading input from stdin:
  829. The '^checkout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  830. dash "-".
  831. Example: cm ^checkout -
  832. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  833. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkout.
  834. Example:
  835. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkout -
  836. (In Windows, checkouts all .c files in the workspace.)
  837. Examples:
  838. cm ^checkout file1.txt file2.txt
  839. (Checkouts 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' files.)
  840. cm ^co *.txt
  841. (Checkouts all txt files.)
  842. cm ^checkout .
  843. (Checkouts current directory.)
  844. cm ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
  845. (Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
  846. cm ^co file.txt --^format="Checking out item {0}"
  847. --^resultformat="Item {0} checked out"
  848. (Checkouts 'file.txt' using the specified formatting strings
  849. to show the progress and the result of the operation.)
  850. cm ^checkout link --^symlink
  851. (Checkouts the symlink file and not the target.)
  852. cm ^checkout . -^R --^ignorefailed
  853. (Recursively checkouts the current folder, ignoring those files that can
  854. not be checked out.)
  855. cm ^co . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
  856. (Checkouts the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  857. easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified strings.)
  858. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  859. Checks the syntax of a selector.
  860. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  861. Usage:
  862. cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css --^file=<selector_file>
  863. (Checks the selector file syntax.)
  864. ^cat <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
  865. (Unix. Checks selector file from standard input.)
  866. ^type <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
  867. (Windows. Checks selector file from standard input.)
  868. Options:
  869. --^file The file to read a selector from.
  870. == CMD_HELP_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  871. Remarks:
  872. This command reads a selector on either a file or standard input, and
  873. checks it for valid syntax. If the syntax check fails, the reason is
  874. printed on standard output.
  875. Examples:
  876. cm ^checkselectorsyntax --^file=myselector.txt
  877. (Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' file.)
  878. ^cat myselector.txt | cm ^checkselectorsyntax
  879. (Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' from standard input.)
  880. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
  881. Changes an item revision type (binary or text).
  882. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
  883. Usage:
  884. cm ^changerevisiontype | ^chgrevtype | ^crt <item_path>[ ...] --^type=(^bin | ^txt)
  885. Options:
  886. item_path Items to change revision type. Use double quotes (" ")
  887. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  888. separate item paths.
  889. --^type Target revisions type. Choose '^bin' or '^txt'.
  890. == CMD_HELP_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
  891. Remarks:
  892. This command can only be applied to files, not directories.
  893. The specified type must be a system supported one: '^bin' or '^txt' (binary
  894. or text).
  895. Examples:
  896. cm ^changerevisiontype c:\workspace\file.txt --^type=^txt
  897. (Changes 'file.txt' revision type to text.)
  898. cm ^chgrevtype comp.zip "image file.jpg" --^type=^bin
  899. (Changes 'comp.zip' and "image file.jpg" revision type to binary.)
  900. cm ^crt *.* --^type=^txt
  901. (Changes revision type of all files to text.)
  902. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  903. Edits a trigger.
  904. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  905. Usage:
  906. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^edit <subtype_type> <position_number>
  907. [--^position=<new_position>]
  908. [--^name=<new_name>] [--^script=<script_path>]
  909. [--^filter=<str_filter>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  910. Options:
  911. --^position New position of the specified trigger.
  912. This position must not be in use by another
  913. trigger of the same type.
  914. --^name New name of the specified trigger.
  915. --^script New execution path of the specified trigger script.
  916. If the script starts with "^webtrigger ", it will be
  917. considered as a web trigger. See Remarks for more
  918. further details.
  919. --^filter Checks only items that match the specified filter.
  920. --^server Modifies the trigger on the specified server.
  921. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  922. one configured on the client.
  923. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
  924. specs.)
  925. subtype_type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  926. (Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  927. types.)
  928. position_number Position occupied by the trigger to be modified.
  929. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  930. Remarks:
  931. Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
  932. as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
  933. against the specified URI, where the request body contains a JSON
  934. dictionary with the trigger environment variables, and a fixed INPUT key
  935. pointing to an array of strings.
  936. Examples:
  937. cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-setselector 6 --^name="Backup2 manager" --^script="/new/path/al/script"
  938. cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
  939. cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-add 2 --^script="^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
  940. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CODEREVIEW ==
  941. Creates, edits, or deletes code reviews.
  942. == CMD_USAGE_CODEREVIEW ==
  943. Usage:
  944. cm ^codereview <spec> <title> [--^status=<status_name>]
  945. [--^assignee=<user_name>] [--^format=<str_format>]
  946. [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  947. (Creates a code review.)
  948. cm ^codereview -^e <id> [--^status=<status_name>] [--^assignee=<user_name>]
  949. [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  950. (Edits a code review.)
  951. cm ^codereview -^d <id> [ ...] [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  952. (Deletes one or more code reviews.)
  953. Options:
  954. -^e Edits the parameters of an existing code review.
  955. -^d Deletes one or more existing code reviews. Use a
  956. whitespace to separate the code reviews IDs.
  957. --^status Sets the new status of a code review. See Remarks for
  958. additional information.
  959. --^assignee Sets the new assignee of a code review.
  960. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  961. Remarks for additional information.
  962. --^repository Sets the repository to be used as default. (Use
  963. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository specs.)
  964. spec It can be either a changeset spec, a shelve spec or a branch spec.
  965. It will be the target of the new code review. (Use 'cm ^help
  966. ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset or branch specs.)
  967. title A text string to be used as title of the new code review.
  968. id The code review identification number. A GUID can be used as
  969. well.
  970. == CMD_HELP_CODEREVIEW ==
  971. Remarks:
  972. This command allows users to manage code reviews: create, edit, and delete
  973. code reviews for changesets or branches.
  974. To create a new code review, a changeset/branch spec and a title are
  975. required. The initial status and assignee can be set, too. An ID (or GUID
  976. if requested) will be returned as a result.
  977. To edit or delete an existing code review, the target code review ID
  978. (or GUID) is required. No messages are displayed if there are no errors.
  979. The 'status parameter' must only be one of the following: "^Under ^review"
  980. (default), "^Reviewed", or "^Rework ^required".
  981. The 'repository' parameter is available to set the default working
  982. repository. This is useful when the user wants to manage reviews on
  983. a server different than the one associated to the current workspace, or
  984. when there is no current workspace at all.
  985. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  986. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  987. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  988. {0} id
  989. {1} guid
  990. Please note that the '--^format' parameter only takes effect when creating
  991. a new code review.
  992. Examples:
  993. cm ^codereview ^cs:1856@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" --^assignee=dummy
  994. cm ^codereview ^br:/main/task001@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" \
  995. --^status=^"Rework required" --^assignee=newbie --^format="{^id} -> {^guid}"
  996. cm ^codereview 1367 -^e --^assignee=new_assignee
  997. cm ^codereview -^e 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 --^status=Reviewed
  998. cm ^codereview -^d 1367 --^repository=myremoterepo@myremoteserver:18084
  999. cm ^codereview 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 -^d
  1000. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CRYPT ==
  1001. Encrypts a password.
  1002. == CMD_USAGE_CRYPT ==
  1003. Usage:
  1004. cm ^crypt <mypassword>
  1005. mypassword Password to be encrypted.
  1006. == CMD_HELP_CRYPT ==
  1007. Remarks:
  1008. This command encrypts a given password passed as argument.
  1009. It is designed to encrypt passwords in configuration files and increase
  1010. safety.
  1011. Examples:
  1012. cm ^crypt dbconfpassword -> ENCRYPTED: encrypteddbconfpassword
  1013. (Encrypts the password in the database configuration file: 'db.conf'.)
  1014. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  1015. Deactivates a licensed user.
  1016. == CMD_USAGE_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  1017. Usage:
  1018. cm ^deactivateuser | ^du <usr_name>[ ...] [--^server=<name:port>]
  1019. [--^nosolveuser]
  1020. Options:
  1021. --^server Deactivates the user on the specified server.
  1022. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  1023. one configured on the client.
  1024. --^nosolveuser With this option, the command will not check whether
  1025. the user name exists on the authentication system. The
  1026. <usr_name> must be a user SID.
  1027. usr_name The user name(s) to deactivate. Use a whitespace to
  1028. separate user names. If SID, then '--^nosolveuser' is required.
  1029. == CMD_HELP_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  1030. Remarks:
  1031. This command sets a user to inactive, disabling the usage of Unity VCS
  1032. for that user.
  1033. See the 'cm ^activateuser' command for more information about activating
  1034. Unity VCS users.
  1035. This command checks whether the user exists on the underlying authentication
  1036. system (e.g. ActiveDirectory, LDAP, User/Password...).
  1037. To force the deactivation of a user that no longer exists on the
  1038. authentication system, you can use the '--^nosolveuser' option.
  1039. Examples:
  1040. cm ^deactivateuser john
  1041. cm ^du peter "mary collins"
  1042. cm ^deactivateuser john --^server=myserver:8084
  1043. cm ^deactivateuser S-1-5-21-3631250224-3045023395-1892523819-1107 --^nosolveuser
  1044. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFF ==
  1045. Shows differences between files, changesets, and labels.
  1046. == CMD_USAGE_DIFF ==
  1047. Usage:
  1048. cm ^diff <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec> [<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>]
  1049. [<path>]
  1050. [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
  1051. [--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
  1052. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1053. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
  1054. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  1055. [--^clean]
  1056. [--^integration]
  1057. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
  1058. (Shows differences between a 'source' changeset or shelveset, and a
  1059. 'destination' changeset or shelveset. The changesets can be specified
  1060. using either a changeset or label specification.
  1061. Where two specifications are given, the first will be the 'source' of
  1062. the diff; the second, the 'destination'.
  1063. If only one specification is given, the 'source' will be the parent
  1064. changeset of the specified 'destination'.
  1065. If an optional path is specified, the Diff window will launch to show
  1066. differences between the two revisions of that file.)
  1067. cm ^diff <revspec1> <revspec2>
  1068. (Shows differences between a pair of revisions. The differences are
  1069. shown in the Diff window. The first revision specified will appear on
  1070. the left.)
  1071. cm ^diff <brspec> [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
  1072. [--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
  1073. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1074. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
  1075. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  1076. [--^clean]
  1077. [--^integration]
  1078. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
  1079. [--^fullpaths | --^fp]
  1080. (Shows the branch differences. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
  1081. about specs.)
  1082. Options:
  1083. --^added Prints only differences consisting of items added to
  1084. the repository.
  1085. --^changed Prints only differences consisting of items that
  1086. changed.
  1087. --^moved Prints only differences consisting of moved or renamed
  1088. items.
  1089. --^deleted Prints only differences consisting of items that were
  1090. deleted.
  1091. --^repositorypaths Prints repository paths instead of workspace paths.
  1092. (This option overrides the '--^fullpaths' option.)
  1093. --^download Stores the differences content in the specified output
  1094. path.
  1095. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1096. See the MSDN documentation at
  1097. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1098. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1099. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1100. --^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
  1101. --^clean Does not take into account the differences generated
  1102. because of a merge, but only the differences created by
  1103. simple checkins.
  1104. --^integration Shows the branch changes that are pending to be merged into
  1105. its parent branch. It takes into account any rebase or
  1106. prior merge already done from/to its parent branch.
  1107. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1108. Remarks for more info.
  1109. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1110. --^fullpaths, --^fp Forces printing full workspace paths for files and
  1111. directories when possible.
  1112. == CMD_HELP_DIFF ==
  1113. Remarks:
  1114. File status:
  1115. If '--^added', '--^changed', '--^moved' or '--^deleted' are
  1116. not specified, then the command prints all differences.
  1117. '^A' means added items.
  1118. '^C' means changed items.
  1119. '^D' means deleted items.
  1120. '^M' means moved items. The left item is the original, the right is the destination.
  1121. Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
  1122. ^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
  1123. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
  1124. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1125. ^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1126. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1127. The parameters of this command are the following:
  1128. {^path} Item path.
  1129. {^date} Change date/time.
  1130. {^owner} Change author.
  1131. {^revid} Revision id of the revision considered as the
  1132. destination in the diff.
  1133. {^parentrevid} Revision id of the parent of the revision considered
  1134. as the destination of the diff.
  1135. {^baserevid} Revision id of the revision considered as the source
  1136. in the diff.
  1137. {^srccmpath} Server path before moving the item (move operation).
  1138. {^dstcmpath} Server path after moving the item (move operation).
  1139. {^type} Item type: ^D (directory), ^B (binary file), ^F (text
  1140. file), ^S (symlink), ^X (Xlink)
  1141. {^repository} Repository of the item.
  1142. {^status} Item status: ^A (added), ^D (deleted), ^M (moved), ^C
  1143. (changed)
  1144. {^fsprotection} Shows item permissions (Linux/Mac chmod).
  1145. {^srcfsprotection} Shows parent revision item permissions.
  1146. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1147. Notes on '^revid':
  1148. For added items, the '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' will be -1, as no
  1149. previous revision exists in this case.
  1150. For deleted items, the '^revid' is the id of the source revision, and the
  1151. '^baserevid' will be -1, as there is no destination revision.
  1152. For Xlinks, both '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' are always -1.
  1153. Examples:
  1154. Comparing branches:
  1155. cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001
  1156. cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 \doc\readme.txt
  1157. cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 --^integration
  1158. Comparing changeset trees:
  1159. cm ^diff 19
  1160. cm ^diff 19 25
  1161. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:25 --^format="{^path} {^parentrevid}"
  1162. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^format="{^date} {^path}" --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
  1163. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^changed
  1164. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^repositorypaths
  1165. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^download="D:\temp"
  1166. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^clean
  1167. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 \doc\readme.txt
  1168. Comparing label trees:
  1169. cm ^diff ^lb:FirstReleaseLabel ^lb:SecondReleaseLabel
  1170. cm ^diff ^lb:tag_193.2 ^cs:34214
  1171. cm ^diff ^cs:31492 ^lb:tag_193.2
  1172. Comparing shelve trees:
  1173. cm ^diff ^sh:2
  1174. cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
  1175. Comparing revspecs:
  1176. cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
  1177. cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
  1178. ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
  1179. cm ^diff ^rev:foo.c#^cs:1 ^rev:foo.c#^cs:2 --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
  1180. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1181. Shows diff metrics between two revs.
  1182. == CMD_USAGE_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1183. Usage:
  1184. cm ^diffmetrics | ^dm <revspec1> <revspec2> [--^format=<str_format>]
  1185. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1186. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
  1187. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  1188. Options:
  1189. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1190. Remarks for more info.
  1191. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1192. See the MSDN documentation at
  1193. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1194. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1195. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1196. --^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method.
  1197. See Remarks for more info.
  1198. revspec Revisions used to compare.
  1199. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
  1200. == CMD_HELP_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1201. Remarks:
  1202. The metrics are: number of changed, added, and deleted lines.
  1203. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1204. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1205. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1206. {0} Number of changed lines.
  1207. {1} Number of added lines.
  1208. {2} Number of deleted lines.
  1209. Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
  1210. ^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
  1211. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
  1212. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1213. ^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1214. Examples:
  1215. cm ^diffmetrics file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^br:/main/scm0211 \
  1216. --^format="There are {0} changed, {1} added and {2} deleted lines."
  1217. (Retrieves diffmetrics results formatted.)
  1218. cm ^dm file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^cs:3 --^encoding=utf-8 --^comparisonmethod=^ignorewhitespaces
  1219. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTEXPORT ==
  1220. Exports a repository in fast-export format.
  1221. == CMD_USAGE_FASTEXPORT ==
  1222. Usage:
  1223. cm ^fast-export | ^fe <repspec> <fast-export-file>
  1224. [--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
  1225. [--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
  1226. [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
  1227. [--^nodata] [--^from=<changesetid>] [--^to=<changesetid>]
  1228. Options:
  1229. repspec The repository which the data will be exported from.
  1230. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  1231. fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git fast-export
  1232. format.
  1233. --^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports. This file
  1234. has been previously exported by '--^export-marks'. The
  1235. changesets described in this file will not be imported
  1236. because they were already in a previous import.
  1237. --^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will be saved.
  1238. This file is used in a later fast-import to signal the
  1239. changesets that have been already imported.
  1240. --^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in the branch
  1241. hierarchy. This option allows using char as a hierarchy
  1242. separator, so main-task-sub would be mapped in Unity VCS
  1243. as /main/task/sub.
  1244. --^nodata Exports the repository without including the data. This
  1245. is useful to check if the export will run correctly.
  1246. --^from Exports from a particular changeset.
  1247. --^to Exports to a particular changeset.
  1248. == CMD_HELP_FASTEXPORT ==
  1249. Remarks:
  1250. - To import a Unity VCS repository to Git, use a command such as:
  1251. ^cat repo.fe.00 | ^git ^fast-import --^export-marks=marks.git --^import-marks=marks.git
  1252. - Incremental export is supported using a marks file that contains the
  1253. changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
  1254. files).
  1255. This means that only the new changesets that were not exported in the
  1256. previous fast-export will be exported.
  1257. Examples:
  1258. cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^import-marks=marks.cm \
  1259. --^export-marks=marks.cm
  1260. (Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
  1261. file in Git fast-export format and creates the marks files to perform
  1262. incremental exports later.)
  1263. cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^from=20
  1264. (Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
  1265. file in Git fast-export format from changeset '20'.)
  1266. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTIMPORT ==
  1267. Imports Git fast-export data into a repository.
  1268. == CMD_USAGE_FASTIMPORT ==
  1269. Usage:
  1270. cm ^fast-import | ^fi <repspec> <fast-export-file>
  1271. [--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
  1272. [--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
  1273. [--^stats] [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
  1274. [--^nodata] [--^ignoremissingchangesets] [--^mastertomain]
  1275. Options:
  1276. repspec The repository into which the data will be
  1277. imported. It is created if it did not previously
  1278. exist. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
  1279. about rep specs.)
  1280. fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git
  1281. fast-export format.
  1282. --^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports.
  1283. This file has been previously exported by
  1284. '--^export-marks'. The changesets described in
  1285. this file wont be imported because they
  1286. were already in a previous import.
  1287. --^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will
  1288. be saved. This file is used in a later
  1289. fast-import to signal the changesets that have
  1290. been already imported.
  1291. --^stats Prints some statistics about the import process.
  1292. --^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in
  1293. the branch hierarchy. This option allows using
  1294. char as a hierarchy separator, so main-task-sub
  1295. would be mapped in Unity VCS as /main/task/sub.
  1296. --^nodata Imports Git fast-export without including the
  1297. data. This is useful to check if the import will
  1298. run correctly.
  1299. --^ignoremissingchangesets Any changesets that cannot be imported are
  1300. discarded and the fast-import operation
  1301. continues without them.
  1302. --^mastertomain Imports using "^main" instead of "^master".
  1303. == CMD_HELP_FASTIMPORT ==
  1304. Remarks:
  1305. - To export a Git repository, use a command such as:
  1306. ^git ^fast-export --^all -^M --^signed-tags=^strip --^tag-of-filtered-object=^drop> ..\git-fast-export.dat
  1307. The -^M option is important to detect moved items.
  1308. - The specified repository is created in case it did not exist.
  1309. - Incremental import is supported using a marks file that contains the
  1310. changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
  1311. files).
  1312. This means that only the new changesets that were not imported in the
  1313. previous fast-import will be imported.
  1314. Examples:
  1315. cm ^fast-import mynewrepo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export
  1316. (Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
  1317. 'mynewrepo' repository on server 'atenea:8084'.)
  1318. cm ^fast-import repo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export --^export-marks=rep.marks
  1319. (Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
  1320. 'repo' repository on server 'atenea:8084' and creates a marks file
  1321. to perform incremental imports later.)
  1322. cm ^fast-import repo@server:8084 repo.fast-export --^import-marks=repo.marks \
  1323. --^export-marks=repo.marks
  1324. (Imports the contents of the 'repo.fast-export' file. Only the new
  1325. changesets that were not in the marks file are imported. The same marks
  1326. file is used to save the list of changesets again for the next
  1327. incremental import.)
  1328. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FILEINFO ==
  1329. Retrieves detailed information about the items in the workspace.
  1330. == CMD_USAGE_FILEINFO ==
  1331. Usage:
  1332. cm ^fileinfo <item_path>[ ...] [--^fields=<field_value>[,...]]
  1333. [[--^xml | -^x [=<output_file>]] | [--^format=<str_format>]]
  1334. [--^symlink] [--^encoding=<name>]
  1335. Options:
  1336. --^fields A string of comma-separated values. This selects which
  1337. fields will be printed for each item. See Remarks for
  1338. more information.
  1339. --^xml | -^x Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  1340. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  1341. cannot be combined with '--^format'.
  1342. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1343. Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
  1344. with '--^xml'.
  1345. This '--^format' option prevails over '--^fields' if both
  1346. are specified.
  1347. --^symlink Applies the fileinfo operation to the symlink and not
  1348. to the target.
  1349. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1350. See the MSDN documentation at
  1351. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1352. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1353. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1354. item_path Items to display. Use a whitespace to separate the items.
  1355. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  1356. == CMD_HELP_FILEINFO ==
  1357. Remarks:
  1358. This command prints a detailed list of attributes for each selected item.
  1359. Each attribute is printed on a new line by default.
  1360. The attribute list can be modified to display only the attributes the user
  1361. needs. This can be achieved using the '--^fields=<field_list>' which accepts
  1362. a string of comma-separated attribute names. This way, only those arguments
  1363. whose name has been indicated are shown.
  1364. Revision head changeset:
  1365. This option is disabled by default. Please note that retrieving this
  1366. attribute is significantly slower than the rest of them, so we advise users
  1367. to group together as many items as possible. This will improve execution
  1368. times by avoiding many separate 'cm ^fileinfo' executions.
  1369. Also, this feature is not currently available for controlled directories.
  1370. You can find below the complete list of available attribute names.
  1371. Names marked with an asterisk ('*') will not be shown by default:
  1372. ^ClientPath The local path on disk for the item.
  1373. ^RelativePath The workspace-relative path.
  1374. ^ServerPath The repository path for the item.
  1375. (Note: Transformed workspaces are not
  1376. currently supported for this option).
  1377. ^Size Item size.
  1378. ^Hash Item hash sum.
  1379. ^Owner The user the item belongs to.
  1380. ^RevisionHeadChangeset (*) The changeset of the revision loaded in the
  1381. head changeset of the branch.
  1382. (Please see note above.)
  1383. ^RevisionChangeset The changeset of the revision currently loaded
  1384. in the workspace.
  1385. ^RepSpec The repository specification for the item.
  1386. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1387. rep specs.)
  1388. ^Status The workspace item status: added, checked out,
  1389. deleted, etc.
  1390. ^Type Revision type (text, binary, directory, symlink,
  1391. or unknown).
  1392. ^Changelist The changelist the item belongs to (if any).
  1393. ^IsLocked (*) Whether the item is locked by exclusive
  1394. checkout or not.
  1395. ^LockedBy (*) The user who exclusively checked out the item.
  1396. ^LockedWhere (*) The location where the item was exclusively
  1397. checked out.
  1398. ^IsUnderXlink Whether the item is located under an Xlink
  1399. or not.
  1400. ^UnderXlinkTarget The target of the Xlink the item is under
  1401. (if any).
  1402. ^UnderXlinkPath The item server path in the Xlinked repository
  1403. (if any).
  1404. ^UnderXlinkWritable Whether the Xlink the item belongs to is
  1405. writable or not.
  1406. ^UnderXlinkRelative Whether the Xlink the items belongs to is
  1407. relative or not.
  1408. ^IsXlink Whether the item itself is a Xlink or not.
  1409. ^XlinkTarget The target repository the item points to, if it
  1410. is a Xlink.
  1411. ^XlinkName The Xlink name of the item, if it is
  1412. actually one.
  1413. ^XlinkWritable Whether the Xlink item is a writable Xlink
  1414. or not.
  1415. ^XlinkRelative Whether the Xlink item is a relative Xlink
  1416. or not.
  1417. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1418. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1419. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1420. - {^ClientPath}
  1421. - {^RelativePath}
  1422. - {^ServerPath}
  1423. - {^Size}
  1424. - {^Hash}
  1425. - {^Owner}
  1426. - {^RevisionHeadChangeset}
  1427. - {^RevisionChangeset}
  1428. - {^Status}
  1429. - {^Type}
  1430. - {^Changelist}
  1431. - {^IsLocked}
  1432. - {^LockedBy}
  1433. - {^LockedWhere}
  1434. - {^IsUnderXlink}
  1435. - {^UnderXlinkTarget}
  1436. - {^UnderXlinkPath}
  1437. - {^UnderXlinkWritable}
  1438. - {^UnderXlinkRelative}
  1439. - {^IsXlink}
  1440. - {^XlinkTarget}
  1441. - {^XlinkName}
  1442. - {^XlinkWritable}
  1443. - {^XlinkRelative}
  1444. - {^RepSpec}
  1445. Please note that '--^format' and '--^xml' options are mutually exclusive, so
  1446. they can't be used at the same time.
  1447. Examples:
  1448. cm ^fileinfo file1.txt file2.txt dir/
  1449. cm ^fileinfo "New Project.csproj" --^xml
  1450. cm ^fileinfo assets.art --^fields=^ServerPath,^Size,^IsLocked,^LockedBy
  1451. cm ^fileinfo proj_specs.docx --^fields=^ServerPath,^RevisionChangeset --^xml
  1452. cm ^fileinfo samples.ogg --^format="{^ServerPath}[{^Owner}] -> {^Size}"
  1453. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FIND ==
  1454. Runs SQL-like queries to find Unity VCS objects.
  1455. == CMD_USAGE_FIND ==
  1456. Usage:
  1457. cm ^find <object_type>
  1458. [^where <str_conditions>]
  1459. [^on ^repository '<repspec>' | ^on ^repositories '<repspec1>','<repspec2>'[,...]]
  1460. [^order ^by <sort_field> ['^asc' | '^desc']]
  1461. [[^limit <maxresults>] [^offset <offset>]]
  1462. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  1463. [--^nototal] [--^file=<dump_file>] [--^xml]
  1464. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1465. Options:
  1466. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
  1467. Read the 'cm ^find' guide to see all the object
  1468. attributes that can be used as output format strings:
  1469. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
  1470. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1471. --^nototal Does not output record count at the end.
  1472. --^file File to dump results.
  1473. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  1474. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1475. See the MSDN documentation at
  1476. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1477. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1478. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1479. str_conditions Searches conditions on an object attributes.
  1480. repspec Searches repositories alias or specification.
  1481. In the case of '^on ^repositories', use a comma to
  1482. separate the repspec fields.
  1483. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  1484. specifications.)
  1485. sort_field The name of the field to use as sorting field. Mind there is only
  1486. a subset of field possibilities. Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects'
  1487. to find what objects are allowed to be ordered and by what fields.
  1488. maxresults The maximun number of results returned by the query.
  1489. offset The number of rows to skip before starting to return results
  1490. from the query.
  1491. object_type Object type to find.
  1492. Some of these objects are implementing the '^order ^by' clause.
  1493. Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects' to learn how to specify these
  1494. objects, the ones allowing '^order ^by' and by what fields.
  1495. You can also read the 'cm ^find' guide:
  1496. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
  1497. == CMD_HELP_FIND ==
  1498. Remarks:
  1499. If no repository is specified, the search is made on the repository
  1500. configured in the workspace.
  1501. When you run queries using comparison operators (>, <, >=, <=) from the
  1502. command line, remember that the shell considers these operators as IO
  1503. redirections. So you will need to enclose the queries in double quotation
  1504. marks.
  1505. The 'cm ^find' command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1506. Each output parameter is identified by a string and the user can refer it
  1507. by typing the parameter number between '{' and '}' brackets.
  1508. Output parameters usually correspond to the attributes of the object.
  1509. These are some valid output format strings:
  1510. - --^format={^id}{^date}{^name}
  1511. - --^format="{^item}#{^branch} ^with ^date {^date}"
  1512. XML and encoding considerations:
  1513. When the '--^xml' option is specified, the command shows the command result
  1514. as an XML text in the standard output. The operating system default encoding
  1515. is used to show the text, so it is possible that not-ANSI characters are
  1516. incorrectly visualized in the console. If you redirect the command output to
  1517. a file, it will be correctly visualized. When both '--^xml' and '--^file'
  1518. options are specified, the default encoding will be utf-8.
  1519. Examples:
  1520. cm ^find ^revision
  1521. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset=23 ^and ^owner='maria'"
  1522. cm ^find ^branch "^on ^repository 'rep1'"
  1523. cm ^find ^label "^on ^repositories 'rep1', '^rep:default@localhost:8084'"
  1524. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^parent='^br:/main' ^on ^repository 'rep1'"
  1525. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}"
  1526. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^xml --^file=c:\queryresults\revs.xml
  1527. cm ^find ^label "^where ^owner='^me' ^limit 10 ^offset 20"
  1528. cm ^find ^branches "^where ^owner='^me' ^order ^by ^branchname ^desc ^limit 10"
  1529. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHANGED ==
  1530. > **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
  1531. Gets a list of changed files.
  1532. == CMD_USAGE_FINDCHANGED ==
  1533. Usage:
  1534. cm ^findchanged | ^fc [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^checkcontent]
  1535. [--^onlychanged] [<path>]
  1536. Options:
  1537. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively finds in directories.
  1538. --^checkcontent Compares files by content.
  1539. --^onlychanged Finds only changed files; checkouts will not be
  1540. obtained.
  1541. path (Default: current directory.)
  1542. Initial path to find changed files.
  1543. == CMD_HELP_FINDCHANGED ==
  1544. Remarks:
  1545. If no '--^checkcontent' option is given, Unity VCS finds changes based on
  1546. the file timestamp.
  1547. When '--^checkcontent' option is specified, the file or folder contents are
  1548. compared, instead of using the timestamp.
  1549. This command is useful to detect changed files while disconnected from
  1550. the Unity VCS server. The output can be piped to the ^checkout command,
  1551. to check the changes later (see examples).
  1552. Examples:
  1553. cm ^findchanged .
  1554. (Finds changed files in the current directory.)
  1555. cm ^findchanged -^R . | cm ^checkout -
  1556. (Checkouts changed elements.)
  1557. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1558. > **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
  1559. Gets a list of checked out items.
  1560. == CMD_USAGE_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1561. Usage:
  1562. cm ^findcheckouts | ^fco [--^format=<str_format>] [--^basepath]
  1563. Options:
  1564. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1565. Remarks for more info.
  1566. --^basepath The path to start searching checkouts from. If not
  1567. specified, the current path is used.
  1568. == CMD_HELP_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1569. Remarks:
  1570. This command is useful to checkin or undocheckout all checked out items in
  1571. one single step, redirecting the standard output to other command.
  1572. See examples.
  1573. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1574. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1575. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1576. {0} Date.
  1577. {1} Owner.
  1578. {2} Workspace info.
  1579. {3} Client machine name.
  1580. {4} Item path.
  1581. {5} Branch and repository info.
  1582. Examples:
  1583. cm ^findcheckouts --^format="File {4} changed on branch {5}"
  1584. (Finds checked out items and formats the output with file path and branch
  1585. and repository info.)
  1586. cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^checkin -
  1587. (Checkins all checked out items.)
  1588. cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^undocheckout -
  1589. (Undocheckouts of all checked out items.)
  1590. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1591. > **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
  1592. Gets a list of private items.
  1593. == CMD_USAGE_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1594. Usage:
  1595. cm ^findprivate | ^fp [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^exclusions] [<path>]
  1596. Options:
  1597. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively finds in directories.
  1598. --^exclusions This option allows cutting the search inside the ignored
  1599. paths, defined by the file ignore.conf.
  1600. path (Default: current directory.)
  1601. Initial path to find private files.
  1602. == CMD_HELP_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1603. Remarks:
  1604. If any path is specified, Unity VCS will begin searching from the
  1605. current directory.
  1606. This command is useful to add private items on a folder, piping the output
  1607. to the '^add' command. See examples.
  1608. Examples:
  1609. cm ^findprivate .
  1610. cm ^findprivate -^R | cm ^add -
  1611. (Recursively searches private items and add them.)
  1612. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETCONFIG ==
  1613. Obtains configuration info.
  1614. == CMD_USAGE_GETCONFIG ==
  1615. Usage:
  1616. cm ^getconfig [^setfileasreadonly] [^location] [^extensionworkingmode]
  1617. [^extensionprefix] [^defaultrepserver]
  1618. Options:
  1619. ^setfileasreadonly Returns whether the protected files are left as
  1620. read-only or not.
  1621. ^location Returns the client config path.
  1622. ^extensionworkingmode Returns the extension working mode.
  1623. ^extensionprefix Returns the configured extension prefix.
  1624. ^defaultrepserver Returns the location of the default repository
  1625. server.
  1626. == CMD_HELP_GETCONFIG ==
  1627. Examples:
  1628. cm ^getconfig ^setfileasreadonly
  1629. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETFILE ==
  1630. Downloads the content of a given revision.
  1631. == CMD_USAGE_GETFILE ==
  1632. Usage:
  1633. cm ^getfile | ^cat <revspec>[[;<output_file>] | [--^file=<output_file>]]
  1634. [--^debug] [--^symlink] [--^raw]
  1635. Options:
  1636. --^file File to save the output. By default, it is printed on the
  1637. standard output. Only usable when a single revision is
  1638. required. If more than one ^revspec is provided, this
  1639. option should be avoided and use '^revspec;^outputfile'
  1640. instead, adding as much pairs as needed separated by
  1641. whitespaces.
  1642. --^debug When a directory specification is used, the command
  1643. shows all the items in the directory, its revision id
  1644. and file system protection.
  1645. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  1646. target.
  1647. --^raw Displays the raw data of the file.
  1648. revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  1649. more about specs.)
  1650. == CMD_HELP_GETFILE ==
  1651. Examples:
  1652. cm ^cat myfile.txt#^br:/main
  1653. (Obtains the last revision in branch '^br:/main' of 'myfile.txt'.)
  1654. cm ^getfile myfile.txt#^cs:3 --^file=tmp.txt
  1655. (Obtains the changeset 3 of 'myfile.txt' and write it to file 'tmp.txt'.)
  1656. cm ^cat ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^br:/main/task003@myrepo
  1657. (Obtains the contents of '/src/foo.c' at the last changeset of branch
  1658. '/main/task003' in repository 'myrepo'.)
  1659. cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
  1660. (Obtains the revision with id 1230.)
  1661. cm ^getfile ^rev:info\ --^debug
  1662. (Obtains all revisions in the 'info' directory.)
  1663. cm ^getfile "^revid:25@^rep:^default@^repserver:^localhost:8084;file_revid25.txt"
  1664. "^revid:16@^rep:^default@^repserver:^localhost:8084;file_revid_16.txt"
  1665. (Obtains two different revisions and stores each one on different files.
  1666. To list ^revid it is possible to use the command '^cm ^find ^revision'.
  1667. Mind that, to specify 'spec;dest_file' collections, it might be needed to
  1668. quote the pairs individually, then separate them using whitespaces).
  1669. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETREVISION ==
  1670. Loads a revision in the workspace.
  1671. == CMD_USAGE_GETREVISION ==
  1672. This command modifies the revision loaded in the workspace, so it can affect
  1673. future merges.
  1674. It is an advanced command inherited from old versions, so use it with care.
  1675. Usage:
  1676. cm ^getrevision <revspec>
  1677. Options:
  1678. revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  1679. more about rev specs.)
  1680. == CMD_HELP_GETREVISION ==
  1681. Examples:
  1682. cm ^getrevision file.txt#^cs:3
  1683. (Gets changeset 3 revision of 'file.txt'.)
  1684. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETSTATUS ==
  1685. Gets the status of an item.
  1686. == CMD_USAGE_GETSTATUS ==
  1687. Usage:
  1688. cm ^getstatus | ^gs <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^stats]
  1689. [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  1690. Options:
  1691. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1692. Remarks for more info.
  1693. --^stats Prints some statistics about the get status process.
  1694. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Shows recursively the status in directories.
  1695. item_path Item or items to get status from. Use double quotes
  1696. (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
  1697. whitespace to separate paths.
  1698. == CMD_HELP_GETSTATUS ==
  1699. Remarks:
  1700. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1701. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1702. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1703. {0} Item path.
  1704. {1} Item status:
  1705. Where status can take values among the following:
  1706. 0 private
  1707. 1 checked in
  1708. 2 checked out
  1709. Reading input from stdin:
  1710. The '^getstatus' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  1711. single dash "-".
  1712. Example:
  1713. cm ^getstatus -
  1714. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  1715. This allows you to use pipe to specify which paths to get the status for.
  1716. Example:
  1717. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^getstatus --^format="Path {0} Status {1}" -
  1718. (In Windows, gets the status of all .c files in the workspace.)
  1719. Examples:
  1720. cm ^getstatus file1.txt file2.txt
  1721. (Gets the status of the files.)
  1722. cm ^gs info\ -^R --^format="The item {0} has the status {1}"
  1723. (Gets the status of the directory and all of its items and shows a
  1724. formatted output.)
  1725. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1726. Gets branches linked with a task.
  1727. == CMD_USAGE_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1728. Usage:
  1729. cm ^gettaskbranches | ^gtb <task_name> [--^format=<str_format>]
  1730. [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  1731. Options:
  1732. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1733. Remarks for more info.
  1734. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1735. task_name The task identifier.
  1736. == CMD_HELP_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1737. Remarks:
  1738. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1739. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1740. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1741. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  1742. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1743. {^name} Branch name.
  1744. {^owner} Owner of the branch.
  1745. {^date} Date when the branch was created.
  1746. {^parent} Parent branch.
  1747. {^comment} Comment of the branch.
  1748. {^repname} Repository where the branch exists.
  1749. {^repserver} Server name.
  1750. Examples:
  1751. cm ^gettaskbranches 4311
  1752. cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name}"
  1753. cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name} {^date}" --^dateformat="yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm:ss"
  1754. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
  1755. Shows info about the workspace selector.
  1756. == CMD_USAGE_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
  1757. Usage:
  1758. cm ^workspaceinfo | ^wi [<wk_path>]
  1759. Options:
  1760. wk_path Path of a workspace on the machine.
  1761. == CMD_HELP_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
  1762. Remarks:
  1763. The '^wi' command shows the working configuration of a workspace (repository,
  1764. branch, and/or label).
  1765. Examples:
  1766. cm ^wi c:\mywk
  1767. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
  1768. Gets workspace info from a path.
  1769. == CMD_USAGE_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
  1770. Usage:
  1771. cm ^getworkspacefrompath | ^gwp <item_path> [--^format=<str_format>] [--^extended]
  1772. Options:
  1773. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1774. Remarks for more info.
  1775. --^extended Displays more information regarding the workspace: ^type
  1776. and ^dynamic on top of the others. See Remarks for more info.
  1777. item_path File or folder on disk.
  1778. == CMD_HELP_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
  1779. Remarks:
  1780. This command shows information about the workspace that is located in path.
  1781. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  1782. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1783. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1784. {0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
  1785. {1} | {^wkpath} Workspace path.
  1786. {2} | {^machine} Client machine name.
  1787. {3} | {^owner} Workspace owner.
  1788. {4} | {^guid} Workspace GUID.
  1789. {5} | {^type} Workspace type: partial (gluon) or regular.
  1790. {6} | {^dynamic} A workspace can be dynamic (plasticfs) or static.
  1791. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  1792. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1793. Examples:
  1794. cm ^getworkspacefrompath c:\myworkspace\code\file1.cpp --^format="Workspace name: {^wkname}"
  1795. cm ^gwp . --^format="Name: {^wkname} | Type: {^type}, {^dynamic}"
  1796. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_HELP ==
  1797. Gets help for a Unity VCS command.
  1798. == CMD_USAGE_HELP ==
  1799. Usage:
  1800. cm ^help <command>
  1801. == CMD_HELP_HELP ==
  1802. Mind this command is partially overlapped with the --^help option at each command.
  1803. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_IOSTATS ==
  1804. Shows statistics about the hardware.
  1805. == CMD_USAGE_IOSTATS ==
  1806. Usage:
  1807. cm ^iostats [<repserverspec>] [<list_of_tests>[ ...]]
  1808. [--^nettotalmb=<value_mb>] [--^networkiterations=<value_iter>]
  1809. [--^diskdatasize=<value_size>] [--^disktestpath=<value_path>]
  1810. [--^systemdisplaytime=<value_time>]
  1811. [--^systemdisplaytimeinterval=<value_interval>]
  1812. Options:
  1813. --^nettotalmb Indicates the amount of user data (in
  1814. MegaBytes) transmitted on a network test,
  1815. such as "^serverDownloadTest" or
  1816. "^serverUploadTest".
  1817. It must be a value between "4" and "512".
  1818. (Default: 16)
  1819. --^networkiterations Indicates the number of iterations of
  1820. "^serverDownloadTest" and/or "^serverUploadTest"
  1821. that will be run.
  1822. It must be a value between "1" and "100".
  1823. (Default: 1)
  1824. --^diskdatasize Indicates the amount of data (in MegaBytes)
  1825. that will be written and then read on the
  1826. "^diskTest".
  1827. It must be a value between "100" and "4096".
  1828. (Default: 512)
  1829. --^disktestpath Path where the "^diskTest" writes the test
  1830. files. If this parameter is not provided,
  1831. the command will try to use the system temp
  1832. path.
  1833. --^systemdisplaytime Time interval (in seconds) showing the usage
  1834. of system resources. This option is available
  1835. for the following tests: "^systemNetworkUsage"
  1836. and "^systemDiskUsage".
  1837. It must be a value between "1" and "3600".
  1838. (Default: 5 seconds).
  1839. --^systemdisplaytimeinterval Time interval (in seconds) between the
  1840. system performance samples. This option is
  1841. available for the following tests:
  1842. "^systemNetworkUsage" and "^systemDiskUsage".
  1843. It must be a value between "1" and "60".
  1844. (Default: 1 second).
  1845. repserverspec An available Unity VCS server to perform
  1846. the network tests, such as "serverUploadTest"
  1847. and/ or "serverDownloadTest".
  1848. If no server is provided, the command tries
  1849. to communicate with the server configured by
  1850. default.
  1851. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1852. server specs.)
  1853. list_of_tests Available tests. Use a whitespace to separate
  1854. test fields. See Remarks for more info.
  1855. == CMD_HELP_IOSTATS ==
  1856. Remarks:
  1857. This command requires an available server be used during the network
  1858. speed tests ("^serverUploadTest" and/or "^serverDownloadTest").
  1859. The '--^diskTestPath' must point to a path that belongs to the physical
  1860. disk drive about to be tested. If no path is specified, the command tries
  1861. to use the system default temp path.
  1862. The disk drive of the specified path must have enough free space to execute
  1863. the test.
  1864. During the command execution, the system can experience a degraded
  1865. performance caused by the tests performed.
  1866. Available tests:
  1867. --^serveruploadtest (Default) Measures the data upload speed from
  1868. Unity VCS client to the server.
  1869. --^serverdownloadtest (Default) Measures the data download speed from
  1870. Unity VCS server to the client.
  1871. --^disktest (Default) Measures the disk read speed and disk
  1872. write speed.
  1873. --^systemnetworkusage Shows the current usage of system network
  1874. resources.
  1875. (It shows Network Interface performance counters
  1876. provided by Microsoft Windows).
  1877. Available in Microsoft Windows only.
  1878. --^systemdiskusage Shows the current usage of system physical
  1879. disks.
  1880. (It shows Network Interface performance counters
  1881. provided by Microsoft Windows).
  1882. Available in Microsoft Windows only.
  1883. Examples:
  1884. cm ^iostats MYSERVER:8087 --^serveruploadtest --^serverdownloadtest --^nettotalmb=32
  1885. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1886. Gets, updates, or finds the issue status in the specified issue tracker.
  1887. == CMD_USAGE_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1888. Usage:
  1889. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^get <task_id> <parameter>[ ...]
  1890. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^update <task_id> <status> <parameter>[ ...]
  1891. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^find <status> <parameter>[ ...]
  1892. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^connection ^check <parameter>[ ...]
  1893. name Name of the issue tracker to connect with.
  1894. Only Jira is supported at the moment.
  1895. task_id Number of the issue to query or update.
  1896. ^status A valid status for an issue in the issue tracker.
  1897. Jira parameters (all are mandatory):
  1898. --^user=<user> The user to authenticate.
  1899. --^password=<password> The password to authenticate.
  1900. --^host=<url> The target url of the issue tracker.
  1901. --^projectkey=<key> The project key of Jira project.
  1902. == CMD_HELP_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1903. Examples:
  1904. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^get 11 --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1905. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1906. (Gets the status of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
  1907. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^update 11 "Done" --^user=user@mail.es \
  1908. --^password=pwd --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1909. (Updates the status to 'Done' of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
  1910. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^find "Done" --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1911. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1912. (Gets the task ids whose status is set to 'Done' for the 'PRJ' project.)
  1913. cm ^issuetracker jira ^connection ^check --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1914. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1915. (Checks whether the configuration parameters are valid or not.)
  1916. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LICENSEINFO ==
  1917. Displays license information and license usage.
  1918. == CMD_USAGE_LICENSEINFO ==
  1919. Usage:
  1920. cm ^licenseinfo | ^li [--^server=<repserverspec>] [--^inactive] [--^active]
  1921. [--^sort=(^name|^status)]
  1922. Options:
  1923. --^server Gets the license info from the specified server.
  1924. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  1925. one configured on the client.
  1926. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
  1927. specs.)
  1928. --^inactive Shows only inactive users in the "license usage" section.
  1929. --^active Shows only active users in the "license usage" section.
  1930. --^sort Sorts users by one of the specified sort options:
  1931. '^name' or '^status'.
  1932. == CMD_HELP_LICENSEINFO ==
  1933. Remarks:
  1934. The information displayed consists of expiration date, activated and
  1935. deactivated users, etc.
  1936. Examples:
  1937. cm ^licenseinfo
  1938. cm ^licenseinfo --^server=myserver:8084
  1939. cm ^licenseinfo --^sort=^name
  1940. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LINKTASK ==
  1941. Links a changeset to a task.
  1942. == CMD_USAGE_LINKTASK ==
  1943. Usage:
  1944. cm ^linktask | ^lt <csetspec> <ext_prefix> <task_name>
  1945. Options:
  1946. csetspec The full changeset specification to link to a task.
  1947. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  1948. specs.)
  1949. ext_prefix The extension prefix of the configured issue tracking
  1950. system to work with.
  1951. task_name The task identifier on the issue tracking system.
  1952. == CMD_HELP_LINKTASK ==
  1953. Examples:
  1954. cm ^lt ^cs:8@^rep:default@^repserver:localhost:8084 jira PRJ-1
  1955. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_LIST ==
  1956. Shows locks on a server.
  1957. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK_LIST ==
  1958. Usage:
  1959. cm ^lock ^list | ^ls [<revspec> [ ...]] [--^server=<server>]
  1960. [--^repository] [--^workingbranch=<brname>] [--^anystatus]
  1961. [--^onlycurrentuser] [--^onlycurrentworkspace]
  1962. [--^ignorecase]
  1963. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  1964. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]
  1965. [--^smartlocks]]
  1966. Options:
  1967. --^server Repository server specification.
  1968. This option will override the default server which
  1969. is retrieved from the current workspace or the
  1970. client.conf file.
  1971. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1972. server specs.)
  1973. --^repository Repository specification.
  1974. This option will only list the locks of the specified
  1975. repository.
  1976. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1977. repository specs.)
  1978. --^workingbranch Branch name.
  1979. This option will only list the locks that apply to
  1980. the destination branch of the specified branch.
  1981. --^anystatus Shows locks in any status (Locked or Retained).
  1982. By default, only locks in Locked status are shown.
  1983. --^onlycurrentuser Filters the results showing only the locks performed
  1984. by the current user.
  1985. --^onlycurrentworkspace Filters the results showing only the locks performed
  1986. on the current workspace (matching them by name).
  1987. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths when a serverpath spec
  1988. is used. With this flag, the command will work for
  1989. "/src/foo.c" even if the user writes "/sRc/fOO.c".
  1990. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1991. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  1992. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  1993. the lines should start.
  1994. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  1995. the lines should end.
  1996. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  1997. the fields should be separated.
  1998. --^smartlocks Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, shows all the
  1999. smart lock fields. Otherwise, it only shows the legacy locks
  2000. fields. This parameter is needed to avoid breaking
  2001. compatibility with older integrations / plugins that expect
  2002. the old format.
  2003. revspec If one or more are present, this command will display
  2004. one lock line for each specified revision if its
  2005. associated item is locked in the server. Otherwise,
  2006. this command will list all locked items in the default
  2007. server (or the one set with the '--^server' option).
  2008. Use a whitespace to separate the rev specs when using
  2009. more than one.
  2010. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
  2011. == CMD_HELP_LOCK_LIST ==
  2012. Remarks:
  2013. The command will display a list of the currently locked items in the
  2014. default server. It also accepts a list of revision specifications. In this
  2015. case, only the locks belonging to the selected items will be displayed.
  2016. A '--^server=<server>' can be used to set the default server to query.
  2017. The command shows a line for every lock in the specified server:
  2018. - Repository of the locked item.
  2019. - Item id of the locked item.
  2020. - GUID of the locked item (this is only printed with the --^machinereadable flag).
  2021. - Date of the lock.
  2022. - Destination branch where the lock will be released.
  2023. - Revision id of the item loaded in the destination branch.
  2024. - Holder branch where the lock was performed.
  2025. - Revision id of the item that currently holds the lock.
  2026. - Status of the lock (Locked or Retained)
  2027. - User name who performed the lock.
  2028. - Workspace name where the lock was performed.
  2029. - Path of the locked item (server path format).
  2030. For the --^machinereadable without the --^smartlocks option, the
  2031. printed fields are:
  2032. - GUID of the locked item.
  2033. - User name who performed the lock.
  2034. - Workspace name where the lock was performed.
  2035. - Path of the locked item (server path format).
  2036. Examples:
  2037. cm ^lock ^list
  2038. cm ^lock ^list --^server=myserver:8084
  2039. cm ^lock ^list --^repository=repo@myserver:8084 --^anystatus
  2040. cm ^lock ^list --^repository=repo@myserver:8084 --^workingbranch=/main/scm21345
  2041. cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
  2042. cm ^lock ^list ^revid:3521@default ^itemid:2381@secondary --^onlycurrentuser
  2043. cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
  2044. cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^onlycurrentworkspace
  2045. cm ^lock ^list --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
  2046. --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  2047. cm ^lock ^list --^machinereadable --^smartlocks --^startlineseparator=">" \
  2048. --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  2049. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LISTUSERS ==
  2050. Lists users and groups.
  2051. == CMD_USAGE_LISTUSERS ==
  2052. Usage:
  2053. cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> [--^onlyusers] [--^onlygroups]
  2054. [--^filter=<str_filter>]
  2055. cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> --^group=<group_name>
  2056. Options:
  2057. --^onlyusers Lists only users.
  2058. --^onlygroups Lists only groups.
  2059. --^filter Lists only users and/or groups that matches the
  2060. specified filter.
  2061. --^group Lists only users from a certain group. This option is
  2062. not compatible with ^onlyusers, ^onlygroups, nor ^filter.
  2063. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  2064. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  2065. == CMD_HELP_LISTUSERS ==
  2066. Examples:
  2067. cm ^lu localhost:8084
  2068. (Lists all users in the server.)
  2069. cm ^listusers localhost:8084 --^onlyusers --^filter=m
  2070. (Lists only the users in the server that contains "m".)
  2071. cm ^listusers codice@cloud --^group=Administrators
  2072. (Lists only the users in the group Administrators in the 'codice@cloud' org.)
  2073. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCATION ==
  2074. Returns the path of 'cm'.
  2075. == CMD_USAGE_LOCATION ==
  2076. Usage:
  2077. cm ^location
  2078. == CMD_HELP_LOCATION ==
  2079. Bear in mind this is related to your environment variables.
  2080. If you have several installations of the client, it will return
  2081. the first one in the path.
  2082. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK ==
  2083. This command allows the user to manage locks.
  2084. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK ==
  2085. Usage:
  2086. cm ^lock <command> [options]
  2087. Commands:
  2088. - ^list | ^ls
  2089. - ^unlock
  2090. - ^create | ^mk
  2091. To get more information about each command run:
  2092. cm ^lock <command> --^usage
  2093. cm ^lock <command> --^help
  2094. == CMD_HELP_LOCK ==
  2095. Examples:
  2096. cm ^lock
  2097. (The '^list' subcommand is the default.)
  2098. cm ^lock ^list --^anystatus
  2099. cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep@localhost:8084
  2100. cm ^lock ^create /main/task@myrep ^itemid:56@myrep
  2101. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOG ==
  2102. Gets info about revisions in changesets.
  2103. == CMD_USAGE_LOG ==
  2104. Usage:
  2105. cm ^log [<csetspec> | <repspec>] [--^from=<csetspec_from>] [--^allbranches]
  2106. [--^ancestors] [--^csformat=<str_format>] [--^itemformat=<str_format>]
  2107. [--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
  2108. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2109. [--^repositorypaths | --^fullpaths | --^fp]
  2110. Options:
  2111. --^from Lists all the changes made in every changeset from the
  2112. changeset specification [csetspec_from] to the
  2113. changeset specification [csetspec].
  2114. The [csetspec_from] changeset is not included in the
  2115. output.
  2116. Ignored when a repository spec is provided.
  2117. --^allbranches Shows information about the changesets created in a
  2118. specified interval, for all the branches where those
  2119. changesets were created.
  2120. --^ancestors Shows information about the reachable changesets by
  2121. following the parent and merge links for the given
  2122. changeset ([csetspec]). If the from changeset
  2123. ([csetspec_from]) is provided too, it will be used as
  2124. lower limit for all the paths. Remarks: The changeset
  2125. changes will not be shown when this option is used.
  2126. --^csformat Retrieves the changeset info in a specific format. See
  2127. Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
  2128. with '--^xml'.
  2129. --^itemformat Retrieves the item info in a specific format. See
  2130. Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
  2131. with '--^xml'.
  2132. --^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
  2133. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  2134. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  2135. cannot be combined with '--^csformat' and '--^itemformat'.
  2136. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  2137. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  2138. See the MSDN documentation at
  2139. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2140. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2141. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2142. --^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing full workspace paths for files and
  2143. directories when possible.
  2144. --^repositorypaths Prints repository paths (server paths) instead of
  2145. workspace paths. (This option overrides the
  2146. '--^fullpaths' option).
  2147. csetspec Returns all changes made in the specified changeset.
  2148. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  2149. specs.)
  2150. repspec Returns all changes made in the specified repository.
  2151. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  2152. specs.)
  2153. == CMD_HELP_LOG ==
  2154. Remarks:
  2155. - If neither 'csetspec' nor option is specified, the command shows
  2156. information about every changeset created within the last month in every
  2157. branch.
  2158. - If only the option '--^from' is included, the command shows the
  2159. information about every changeset from that specified changeset to the
  2160. last changeset in the branch where the changeset was created.
  2161. - If the option '--^allbranches' appears without an interval, the command
  2162. retrieves the same information as it would do if only 'csetspec' was
  2163. specified.
  2164. - If the '--^from' is used, the output contains information from the
  2165. 'csetspec_from'+1 on.
  2166. - The repository used to show the changeset information is the one loaded
  2167. in the path where the command executes on.
  2168. This command accepts a format string for the items ('--^itemformat') and a
  2169. format string for the changesets ('--^csformat').
  2170. The output parameters of '--^csformat' are the following:
  2171. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2172. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2173. {^changesetid} Changeset number.
  2174. {^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
  2175. {^date} Date of the changeset.
  2176. {^owner} Owner of the changeset.
  2177. {^comment} Comment of the changeset.
  2178. {^items} Items involved in the changeset.
  2179. {^repository} Repository where the changeset exists.
  2180. {^repserver} Server name.
  2181. The output parameters of '--^itemformat' are the following:
  2182. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2183. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2184. {^path} Item path.
  2185. {^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
  2186. {^date} Date of the changeset.
  2187. {^owner} Owner of the changeset.
  2188. {^shortstatus} Prints the short format for the status. See below.
  2189. {^fullstatus} Prints the long format for the status. See below.
  2190. Short format and its corresponding long format:
  2191. '^A' ^Added
  2192. '^D' ^Deleted
  2193. '^M' ^Moved
  2194. '^C' ^Changed
  2195. These are valid output strings:
  2196. - --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
  2197. - --^itemformat="{^newline}The item {^path} was changed in the branch {^branch}."
  2198. Date format parameters (--^dateformat):
  2199. To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
  2200. See the supported formats specified at:
  2201. https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
  2202. Examples:
  2203. cm ^log
  2204. (Shows information about every changeset created in the last month in every
  2205. branch.)
  2206. cm ^log ^cs:16
  2207. (Shows information about the changes done in the changeset 16 in the branch
  2208. where the changeset was created.)
  2209. cm ^log ^cs:16 --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on \
  2210. {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
  2211. (Shows the information in the specified format.)
  2212. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50
  2213. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2214. from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50.)
  2215. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50 --^allbranches
  2216. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2217. from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50 in every branch of the
  2218. repository.)
  2219. cm ^log ^rep:myrep@localhost:8084
  2220. (Shows information about the changes done in the specified repository.
  2221. No workspace is required to run the command.)
  2222. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20@^rep:mainRep@localhost:8084
  2223. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2224. from the changeset 21. No workspace is required to run the command, because
  2225. the full changeset spec was specified.)
  2226. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LIST ==
  2227. Lists the contents of a tree.
  2228. == CMD_USAGE_LIST ==
  2229. Usage:
  2230. cm ^ls | ^dir [<paths>[ ...]] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^symlink]
  2231. [--^selector[=<selector_format>]] [--^tree=<obj_spec>]
  2232. [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  2233. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2234. Options:
  2235. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2236. Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
  2237. with '--^xml'.
  2238. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  2239. target.
  2240. --^selector Gets the content from the active workspace selector.
  2241. If selector_format is specified, then lists the
  2242. specified selector.
  2243. This is mostly deprecated since selectors are
  2244. no longer a central part of Unity VCS since 4.x.
  2245. --^tree Lists the tree in the specified changeset or branch.
  2246. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  2247. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Lists recursively.
  2248. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  2249. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  2250. cannot be combined with '--^format'.
  2251. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  2252. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  2253. See the MSDN documentation at
  2254. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2255. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2256. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2257. paths List of paths to show. Use a whitespace to separate
  2258. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  2259. containing spaces.
  2260. == CMD_HELP_LIST ==
  2261. Remarks:
  2262. - Path can be typed with meta-characters.
  2263. - The list depends on the workspace selector.
  2264. - The output of the command can be formatted specifying a format string.
  2265. - If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are specified, the given
  2266. path must be a server path (a.k.a.: 'cm path'): /dir/file.txt, not a
  2267. workspace path: C:\Users\myuser\mywk\dir\file.txt
  2268. - If no path is provided, the workspace path assumed is the current
  2269. directory. If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are used, then
  2270. the root path ("/") is assumed.
  2271. The default format string is:
  2272. "{^size,10} {^date:dd/MM/yyyy} {^date:HH:mm}\
  2273. {^type,-6} {^location,-12} {^checkout,-5} {^name}\
  2274. {^symlinktarget}"
  2275. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  2276. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2277. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2278. - {^size}
  2279. - {^formattedsize}
  2280. - {^date}
  2281. - {^type}
  2282. - ^dir: directory,
  2283. - ^txt: text file,
  2284. - ^File: file.
  2285. - {^location} (Example: ^br:branch#cset)
  2286. - {^checkout}
  2287. - {^name}
  2288. - {^changeset}
  2289. - {^path}
  2290. - {^repspec}
  2291. - {^owner}
  2292. - {^revid}
  2293. - {^parentrevid}
  2294. - {^itemid}
  2295. - {^brid}
  2296. - {^repid}
  2297. - {^server}
  2298. - {^symlinktarget}
  2299. - {^hash}
  2300. - {^chmod}
  2301. - {^wkpath} (Path relative to workspace root)
  2302. - {^branch}
  2303. - {^newlocation} (cset@branch)
  2304. - {^guid} (Will take longer to resolve)
  2305. - {^itemguid}
  2306. - {^transformed} (Show applied rule for transformed items. Check the
  2307. Administrator Guide to learn about Transformable workspaces:
  2308. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide)
  2309. You can customize the '^ls' format setting the PLASTIC_LS_FORMAT environment
  2310. variable.
  2311. Examples:
  2312. cm ^ls
  2313. cm ^ls c:\workspace\src
  2314. cm ^ls --^format={^name}
  2315. (Only file names.)
  2316. cm ^ls --^symlink
  2317. (Displays information about the symlink instead of the target file or
  2318. directory.)
  2319. cm ^ls code --^selector
  2320. (Shows the content of the 'code' subdirectory from the current workspace
  2321. selector.)
  2322. cm ^ls /code --^selector="^rep 'myrep' ^path '/' ^branch '/^main'"
  2323. (Shows the content of the '/code' subdirectory on the specified selector.
  2324. Note that the path is specified in server format.)
  2325. cm ^ls /code --^tree=44@myrep@denver:7070
  2326. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset 44 at repo 'myrep' at server
  2327. 'denver:7070'.)
  2328. cm ^ls /code --^tree=^br:/main/scm13596@myrep@denver:7070
  2329. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at the latest changeset in branch
  2330. '/main/scm13596' at repo 'myrep' at server 'denver:7070'.)
  2331. cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@myrep@denver:7070
  2332. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset
  2333. ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77 at repo 'myrep' at server
  2334. 'denver:7070'.)
  2335. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2336. Lists the triggers of a given type on a server.
  2337. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2338. Usage:
  2339. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^list | ^ls [<subtype-type>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  2340. [--^format=<str_format>]
  2341. Options:
  2342. --^server Lists the triggers on the specified server.
  2343. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  2344. one configured on the client.
  2345. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
  2346. specs.)
  2347. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2348. Remarks for more info.
  2349. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  2350. (Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  2351. types.)
  2352. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2353. Remarks:
  2354. If the type is not specified, lists all the triggers on the server.
  2355. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  2356. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2357. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2358. {0} Trigger position.
  2359. {1} Trigger name.
  2360. {2} Trigger path.
  2361. {3} Trigger owner.
  2362. {4} Trigger type.
  2363. {5} Trigger filter.
  2364. Examples:
  2365. cm ^trigger list after-mklabel
  2366. (Lists all triggers of type 'after-mklabel' on the server configured on the
  2367. client.)
  2368. cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
  2369. (Lists all triggers of type 'before-mkbranch' on server 'myserver:8084'.)
  2370. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2371. > **This command is deprecated.**
  2372. == CMD_USAGE_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2373. Usage:
  2374. cm ^manipulateselector | ^ms [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>] --^atdate=<sel_date>
  2375. wk_path Path of the workspace.
  2376. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  2377. learn more about specs.)
  2378. Options:
  2379. --^atdate Returns a selector that will recreate the workspace as
  2380. it would have looked at the specified date.
  2381. == CMD_HELP_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2382. Remarks:
  2383. If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
  2384. current directory as workspace path.
  2385. Examples:
  2386. cm ^manipulateselector c:\workspace --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2387. cm ^manipulateselector --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2388. cm ^manipulateselector > mySelector.txt --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2389. cm ^manipulateselector ^wk:build_wk@BUILDER --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2390. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MERGE ==
  2391. Merges a branch with another branch.
  2392. == CMD_USAGE_MERGE ==
  2393. Usage:
  2394. cm ^merge <source_spec> [--^merge] [--^cherrypicking] [--^forced]
  2395. [--^mergetype=(^onlyone|^onlysrc|^onlydst|^try|^forced)]
  2396. [--^interval-origin=<csetspec> | --^ancestor=<csetspec>]
  2397. [--^keepsource | --^ks] [--^keepdestination | --^kd]
  2398. [--^automaticresolution=<conflict-types>[;...]]
  2399. [--^subtractive] [--^mount] [--^printcontributors]
  2400. [--^noprintoperations] [--^silent]
  2401. [(--^to=<brspec> | --^destination=<brspec>)[--^shelve]]
  2402. [--^no-dst-changes]
  2403. [-^c=<str_comment> | --^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  2404. [--^resolveconflict --^conflict=<index>
  2405. --^resolutionoption=(^src|^dst|(^rename --^resolutioninfo=<strname>))
  2406. --^mergeresultfile=<path> --^solvedconflictsfile=<path>]
  2407. [--^nointeractiveresolution]
  2408. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2409. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  2410. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  2411. Options:
  2412. --^merge Performs the merge. Otherwise, prints the
  2413. conflicts found.
  2414. --^cherrypicking Merges the changes included on the source
  2415. changesets. This option is not used if the merge
  2416. source specification is a label.
  2417. --^forced Does not check if the source and destination are
  2418. already connected.
  2419. This option is only available for interval merge
  2420. and cherry picking.
  2421. --^mergetype Type of the merge. See Remarks for more info.
  2422. --^interval-origin Specifies which changeset is chosen as the
  2423. interval origin, so the merge will only take the
  2424. differences between the source changeset and the
  2425. specified interval origin.
  2426. --^ancestor This is an alias of '--^interval-origin'.
  2427. --^keepsource Accepts all changes from source contributor for
  2428. items with conflicts.
  2429. --^keepdestination Preserves changes from destination contributor
  2430. for items with conflicts.
  2431. --^automaticresolution Used to resolve directory conflicts. This option
  2432. lets you choose whether the source or the
  2433. destination contributor should be automatically
  2434. selected to resolve the conflict.
  2435. Use a semicolon to separate conflict types.
  2436. See Remarks for more info.
  2437. --^subtractive Deletes changes introduced by a merge. The
  2438. parameter passed to the command (source_spec) is
  2439. used to specify which is the source to delete
  2440. changes. It must be a changeset. In the case of a
  2441. changeset interval, the '--^interval-origin' must
  2442. be used to define the interval origin. To remove
  2443. a change, the system creates a new checked out
  2444. revision which will have the content of the
  2445. previous one except for the deleted changes.
  2446. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  2447. --^printcontributors Prints the contributors (base, source, and
  2448. destination).
  2449. --^noprintoperations Silently resolves merges without showing
  2450. information about the resolution.
  2451. --^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
  2452. --^to | --^destination Performs a merge-to operation to the specified
  2453. branch (by entering a branch spec or brspec)
  2454. with full conflict resolution.
  2455. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  2456. branch specs.)
  2457. A "merge-to" (or workspace-less merge) is a merge
  2458. done in the server side. While normal merges
  2459. happen on a workspace merging "from" a branch,
  2460. label or changeset, a merge-to happens entirely
  2461. on the server. While in normal merges the
  2462. "destination" is the workspace, in "merge-to" a
  2463. destination must be always specified (that's why
  2464. we call it "to").
  2465. Check the following link for more information
  2466. about the "merge to" feature:
  2467. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/mergeto
  2468. --^shelve Creates a shelve with the changes of the merge
  2469. result (plus merge traceability info) instead of
  2470. creating a new changeset. This option is not
  2471. available when the merge source is a shelve. This
  2472. option is only available for server-side-merge
  2473. (a.k.a. "merge-to"). Hence, the '--^to' and
  2474. '--^merge' options are required.
  2475. --^no-dst-changes Ensures that the destination contributor doesn't
  2476. have changes (the destination changeset is also
  2477. the common ancestor). When there are changes on
  2478. the destination, the merge is not allowed.
  2479. -^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset
  2480. created in the merge operation.
  2481. --^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  2482. changeset created in the merge operation.
  2483. --^resolveconflict (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2484. Used to solve a directory conflict.
  2485. --^conflict Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, specifies
  2486. the index of the conflict to solve starting at 1.
  2487. --^resolutionoption Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, indicates
  2488. the type of the conflict resolution. Use one of
  2489. the following options: '^src', '^dst', '^rename'.
  2490. See Remarks for more info.
  2491. --^resolutioninfo Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, provides
  2492. the name to use when the '--^resolutionoption'
  2493. option is 'rename'.
  2494. --^mergeresultfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
  2495. into a file the information of the merge result
  2496. between different calls .The specified path will
  2497. be created during the first call and updated on
  2498. each next call.
  2499. --^solvedconflictsfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
  2500. into a file the information of the conflicts
  2501. solved between different calls. The specified
  2502. path will be created during the first call and
  2503. updated on each next call.
  2504. --^nointeractiveresolution (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2505. Avoids prompting the user for manual conflict.
  2506. This way, a directory conflict won't be solved.
  2507. --^machinereadable (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2508. Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  2509. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  2510. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  2511. cannot be combined with '--^format' nor '--^resolveconflict'.
  2512. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  2513. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  2514. See the MSDN documentation at
  2515. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2516. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2517. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2518. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2519. how the lines should start. (Default: empty string.)
  2520. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2521. how the lines should end. (Default: empty string.)
  2522. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2523. how the fields should be separated. (Default:
  2524. whitespace.)
  2525. source_spec Specification of the source object to merge from
  2526. (See Remarks for more info.)
  2527. == CMD_HELP_MERGE ==
  2528. Remarks:
  2529. This command is used to merge changes between two branches or between a
  2530. label and a branch. The destination of the merge must be always a branch.
  2531. The merge source is specified as an argument.
  2532. Destination is the current content of the workspace.
  2533. For example, to display the elements that will be merged from branch
  2534. task001 to the main branch, the selector must point to the main branch,
  2535. the workspace must be updated, and then:
  2536. cm ^merge ^br:/task001
  2537. To really perform the merge, '--^merge' option is added:
  2538. cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
  2539. To define the merge source, the following specs can be used:
  2540. - Branch specification (brspec):
  2541. - cm merge [^br:/]br_name
  2542. - Example: cm merge ^br:/main/task001
  2543. (Merges from the last changeset on this branch.)
  2544. - Label specification (lbspec):
  2545. - cm merge ^lb:lb_name
  2546. - Example: cm merge ^lb:BL001
  2547. (Merges from the labeled changeset.)
  2548. - Changeset specification (csetspec):
  2549. - cm merge ^cs:cs_number
  2550. - Example: cm merge ^cs:25
  2551. (Merges from the given changeset content.)
  2552. - Shelve specification (shspec):
  2553. - cm merge ^sh:shelve_number
  2554. - Example: cm merge ^sh:2
  2555. (Merges from the given shelve content.)
  2556. To automatically resolve directory conflicts, use '--^automaticresolution'
  2557. option and specify the type of conflict followed by the contributor
  2558. (source or destination) that must be selected during the merge operation.
  2559. (Separate each "type of conflict"-"contributor" pair by a semicolon (;).)
  2560. For example:
  2561. cm ^merge ^cs:2634 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^eviltwin-src;^changedelete-src
  2562. (The merge operation from changeset 2634 resolves the "^eviltwin" and
  2563. "^changedelete" conflicts by keeping the source ("-^src") contributor in
  2564. both cases.)
  2565. - A "-^src" suffix after a conflict type tells the merge command to keep the
  2566. source contributor changes.
  2567. - A "-^dst" suffix will keep the destination contributor changes.
  2568. This is the list of conflict types the merge command supports:
  2569. - ^movedeviltwin
  2570. - ^eviltwin
  2571. - ^changedelete
  2572. - ^deletechange
  2573. - ^movedelete"
  2574. - ^deletemove
  2575. - ^loadedtwice
  2576. - ^addmove
  2577. - ^moveadd
  2578. - ^divergentmove
  2579. - ^cyclemove
  2580. - ^all
  2581. The "^all" value overrides the other options. In the following example,
  2582. "^eviltwin-dst" will be ignored:
  2583. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task062 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^all-src;^eviltwin-dst
  2584. Check the following link to learn more about merge conflicts:
  2585. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/directorymerges
  2586. These are the options for '--^mergetype':
  2587. ^onlyone Automatic merge if only one contributor modified the item.
  2588. ^onlysrc Automatic merge if only source contributor modified the item.
  2589. ^onlydst Automatic merge if only destination contributor modified the item.
  2590. ^try Automatic merge if only one contributor has modified the
  2591. conflictive piece of code (each conflict).
  2592. ^forced Always try to solve all non-automatic conflicts.
  2593. These are the options that are mainly used by plugins and integrations:
  2594. - '--^resolveconflict' to solve a directory conflict. You also have to
  2595. use the following options:
  2596. - '--^conflict' is the index of the conflict that you want to
  2597. solve, starting at 1.
  2598. - '--^resolutionoption' indicates the conflict resolution to
  2599. use. This can be:
  2600. - '^src' to keep the source change and discard the
  2601. destination change
  2602. - '^dst' to keep the destination change and discard the
  2603. source change
  2604. - '^rename' (only if the conflict type supports this
  2605. resolution), to rename the destination to the given name
  2606. provided with the '--^resolutioninfo' option.
  2607. - '--^resolutioninfo' to provide the name to use on a
  2608. '^rename' resolution
  2609. - '--^mergeresultfile' and '--^solvedconflictsfile', both used to
  2610. store the merge info between different calls.
  2611. - '--^nointeractiveresolution' indicates the merge to not ask the user for
  2612. manual conflict resolution.
  2613. - '--^machinereadable' and '--^startlineseparator', '--^endlineseparator',
  2614. '--^fieldseparator' options to print the output on a machine-readable
  2615. way (easier-to-parse).
  2616. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  2617. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  2618. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  2619. you to specify the comment.
  2620. Specification of the source:
  2621. Branch specification '[^br:/]br_name'
  2622. Label specification '^lb:lb_name'
  2623. Changeset specification '^cs:cs_number'
  2624. Shelve specification '^sh:shelve_number'
  2625. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  2626. Examples:
  2627. cm ^merge ^br:/task001
  2628. (Does not merge, just prints items to be merged.)
  2629. cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
  2630. (Does merge from branch 'task001'.)
  2631. cm ^merge ^cs:5 --^merge --^cherrypicking --^interval-origin=^cs:2
  2632. (Cherry pick from the changeset interval (2,5].)
  2633. cm ^merge ^cs:8 --^merge --^subtractive --^keepdestination
  2634. (Subtractive merge from changeset 8, keeping destination changes for those
  2635. elements with conflicts.)
  2636. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge -^c="Integrated new UI"
  2637. (Does server-side merge, a.k.a. merge-to, from branch 'task001' to branch
  2638. 'main' and sets a comment.)
  2639. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^shelve
  2640. (Does server-side merge from branch 'task001' to branch 'main' and leaves
  2641. the result on a shelve.)
  2642. cm ^merge ^sh:2 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^no-dst-changes
  2643. (Applies the shelve 2 into 'main' only if it was created from the current
  2644. 'main' head')
  2645. cm ^merge --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=start@_@line \
  2646. --^endlineseparator=new@_@line --^fieldseparator=def#_#sep \
  2647. --^mergeresultfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6C.tmp \
  2648. --^solvedconflictsfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6D.tmp \
  2649. --^resolveconflict --^conflict=1 --^resolutionoption=rename \
  2650. --^resolutioninfo=bin_dst ^br:/main/task --^merge
  2651. (Example for plugins and integrations)
  2652. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2653. Creates a new attribute.
  2654. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2655. Usage:
  2656. cm ^attribute | ^att ^create | ^mk <att_name>
  2657. Options:
  2658. att_name Attribute name
  2659. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2660. Remarks:
  2661. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  2662. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  2663. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  2664. you to specify the comment.
  2665. Examples:
  2666. cm ^attribute ^create status
  2667. (Creates the attribute 'status'.)
  2668. cm ^att ^mk integrated
  2669. (Creates the attribute 'integrated'.)
  2670. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH ==
  2671. Allows the user to manage branches.
  2672. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH ==
  2673. Usage:
  2674. cm ^branch | ^br <command> [options]
  2675. Commands:
  2676. - ^create | ^mk
  2677. - ^delete | ^rm
  2678. - ^rename
  2679. - ^history
  2680. - ^showmain
  2681. - ^showmerges
  2682. To get more information about each command run:
  2683. cm ^branch <command> --^usage
  2684. cm ^branch <command> --^help
  2685. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH ==
  2686. Examples:
  2687. cm ^branch /main/scm21345
  2688. cm ^branch ^create /main/scm21345
  2689. cm ^branch ^delete /main/scm21345
  2690. cm ^branch ^rename /main/scm21345 scm21346
  2691. cm ^branch ^history /main/scm21345
  2692. cm ^branch ^showmain
  2693. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
  2694. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2695. Creates a new branch.
  2696. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2697. Usage:
  2698. cm ^branch | ^br [^create | ^mk] <brspec>
  2699. [--^changeset=<csetspec> | --^label=<lbspec>]
  2700. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  2701. Options:
  2702. --^changeset Changeset used as starting point for the new branch.
  2703. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about cset specs.)
  2704. --^label Label used as starting point for the new branch.
  2705. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
  2706. -^c Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
  2707. specified text.
  2708. -^commentsfile Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
  2709. contents of the specified file.
  2710. brspec The new branch name or spec.
  2711. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2712. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2713. Remarks:
  2714. To create a top-level branch, specify the name without any hierarchy.
  2715. For example:
  2716. cm ^br /dev
  2717. If no optional parameter '--^changeset' is specified, the base of the new
  2718. branch will be the last changeset on the parent branch. If the new branch
  2719. is a top-level branch, the base changeset used will be cset 0.
  2720. You can specify a comment using either the '-^c' or the '-^m' switches:
  2721. cm ^branch /main/task001 -^c="This is the comment"
  2722. cm ^branch /main/task001 -^m "This is the comment"
  2723. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  2724. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  2725. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  2726. you to specify the comment.
  2727. Examples:
  2728. cm ^branch task001
  2729. cm ^branch ^create task001
  2730. cm ^branch ^mk task001
  2731. cm ^br ^mk task001
  2732. (All of the examples above, create a top-level 'task001' branch in the
  2733. repository of the current workspace.)
  2734. cm ^branch ^br:/task001/task002@
  2735. (Creates 'task002' branch as child of 'task001'.)
  2736. cm ^br /main/task001@myrep@myserver:8084 -^c="my comment"
  2737. (Creates 'task001' branch as child of 'main' in repository
  2738. 'myrep@myserver:8084' with comment 'my comment'.)
  2739. cm ^branch ^br:/main/task001 --^changeset=2837 -^commentsfile=commenttask001.txt
  2740. (Creates the 'task001' branch as child of 'main' with base 'changeset=2837',
  2741. and applies the comment in 'commenttask001.txt' file.)
  2742. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2743. Deletes one or more branches.
  2744. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2745. Usage:
  2746. cm ^branch | ^br ^delete | ^rm <brspec>[ ...]
  2747. brspec Branch to delete. Use a whitespace to separate branches.
  2748. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
  2749. specs.)
  2750. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2751. Remarks:
  2752. This command deletes one or more branches.
  2753. Examples:
  2754. cm ^branch ^delete /main/task001
  2755. (Deletes the branch with name 'task001' that is a child of 'main' in the
  2756. repository of the current workspace.)
  2757. cm ^br ^rm main/task002 /main/task012@reptest@myserver:8084
  2758. (Deletes branches '/main/task002' in the repository of the current workspace
  2759. and '/main/task012' in the repository 'reptest@myserver:8084'.)
  2760. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2761. Renames a branch.
  2762. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2763. Usage:
  2764. cm ^branch | ^br ^rename <brspec> <new_name>
  2765. brspec Branch to rename.
  2766. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2767. new_name New name for the branch.
  2768. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2769. Remarks:
  2770. This command renames a branch.
  2771. Examples:
  2772. cm ^branch ^rename /main/task0 task1
  2773. (Renames branch '/main/task0' to '/main/task1'.)
  2774. cm ^br ^rename ^br:/main@reptest@server2:8084 secondary
  2775. (Renames the 'main' branch of repository 'reptest' to 'secondary'.)
  2776. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2777. Shows the history of a branch.
  2778. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2779. Usage:
  2780. cm ^branch | ^br ^history <brspec> [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2781. [--^machinereadable]
  2782. brspec The branch specification to obtain the history.
  2783. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2784. Options:
  2785. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2786. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  2787. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2788. Examples:
  2789. cm ^branch ^history ^br:/main/scm001@myrepository@myserver:8084
  2790. (Displays the history of '/main/scm001' branch of 'myrepository' repository
  2791. on 'myserver' server.)
  2792. cm ^br ^history main --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^machinereadable
  2793. (Displays the history of the 'main' branch of the current repository,
  2794. with a given date format, and in an easy-to-parse format.)
  2795. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2796. Shows the main branch of a repository. The main branch of your repository is '/main' by default.
  2797. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2798. Usage:
  2799. cm ^branch | ^br ^showmain [<repspec>] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2800. [--^format=<format_str>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2801. Options:
  2802. --^encoding Specifies the encoding to use in the output,
  2803. i.e.: utf-8.
  2804. See the MSDN documentation at
  2805. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2806. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2807. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2808. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2809. Remarks for more info.
  2810. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2811. repspec The repository specification where to show the main
  2812. branch. If no repspec is specified, the command will show
  2813. the main branch for the repository of the current
  2814. workspace.
  2815. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  2816. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2817. Remarks:
  2818. This command shows the main branch of a repository.
  2819. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  2820. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2821. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2822. {^id} Branch id.
  2823. {^comment} Comment.
  2824. {^date} Date.
  2825. {^name} Name.
  2826. {^owner} Owner.
  2827. {^parent} Parent branch name.
  2828. {^repository} Repository.
  2829. {^repname} Repository name.
  2830. {^repserver} Server.
  2831. {^changeset} Head changeset of the branch.
  2832. Examples:
  2833. cm ^branch ^showmain
  2834. (Displays the main branch for the repository of the current workspace.)
  2835. cm ^branch ^showmain repo@server:8084
  2836. (Displays the main branch for the repository 'repo' in server
  2837. 'server:8084'.)
  2838. cm ^br ^showmain --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^encoding=utf-8
  2839. (Displays the main branch of the repository with a given date format,
  2840. and the output is in utf-8.)
  2841. cm ^br ^showmain --^format="{^id} - {^name}"
  2842. (Displays the main branch of the repository, printing only its id and name.)
  2843. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2844. Shows branches pending to be merged.
  2845. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2846. Usage:
  2847. cm ^branch | ^br ^showmerges <item_path>[ ...]
  2848. [--^format=<format_str>]
  2849. [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2850. Options:
  2851. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2852. Remarks for more info.
  2853. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2854. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2855. Remarks:
  2856. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  2857. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2858. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2859. - {^id} Branch id.
  2860. - {^comment} Comment.
  2861. - {^date} Date.
  2862. - {^name} Name.
  2863. - {^owner} Owner.
  2864. - {^parent} Parent branch name.
  2865. - {^parentid} Parent branch id.
  2866. - {^repid} Repository id.
  2867. - {^repository} Repository.
  2868. - {^repname} Repository name.
  2869. - {^repserver} Repository server.
  2870. Examples:
  2871. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
  2872. (Displays branches involved in the pending merge of 'file.txt'.)
  2873. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt --^format="{^date} {^name}" --^dateformat="ddMMyy"
  2874. (Displays branches involved in the merge, printing only the date and the
  2875. name, with a given date format.)
  2876. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY ==
  2877. Allows the user to manage repositories.
  2878. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY ==
  2879. Usage:
  2880. cm ^repository | ^repo <command> [options]
  2881. Commands:
  2882. - ^create | ^mk
  2883. - ^delete | ^rm
  2884. - ^list | ^ls
  2885. - ^rename
  2886. - ^add
  2887. To get more information about each command run:
  2888. cm ^repository <command> --^usage
  2889. cm ^repository <command> --^help
  2890. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY ==
  2891. Examples:
  2892. cm ^repository
  2893. cm ^repository ^list
  2894. cm ^repository newrepo
  2895. cm ^repository ^create newrepo
  2896. cm ^repository ^rename oldname newname
  2897. cm ^repository ^add C:\repo\
  2898. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2899. Creates a repository on a server.
  2900. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2901. Usage:
  2902. cm ^repository | ^repo <rep_name>
  2903. cm ^repository | ^repo <repserverspec> <rep_name>[ ...]
  2904. cm ^repository | ^repo [^create | ^mk] <rep_name>
  2905. Options:
  2906. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  2907. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
  2908. specs.)
  2909. rep_name Name or names of the new repository or repositories.
  2910. Use a whitespace to separate repository names.
  2911. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2912. Examples:
  2913. cm ^repository MyRep
  2914. cm ^repo 192.168.1.140:8087 Rep01 Rep01/ModuleA Rep01/ModuleB
  2915. cm ^repo ^create Rep01
  2916. cm ^repo ^mk list
  2917. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2918. Deletes a repository from a server.
  2919. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2920. Usage:
  2921. cm ^repository | ^repo ^delete | ^rm <repspec>
  2922. Options:
  2923. repspec Repository specification.
  2924. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  2925. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2926. Remarks:
  2927. Deletes a repository from the repository server.
  2928. The data is not removed from the database backend, but unplugged
  2929. so that it will not be accessible anymore.
  2930. (Data can be reconnected afterwards, see 'cm ^repository ^add'.)
  2931. Examples:
  2932. cm ^repository ^delete myrepository@^repserver:myserver:8084
  2933. cm ^repository ^rm myrepository@myserver:8084
  2934. cm ^repo ^rm myrepository
  2935. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2936. Lists the repositories on a server.
  2937. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2938. Usage:
  2939. cm ^repository | ^repo [^list | ^ls] [<repserverspec>] [--^format=<str_format>]
  2940. Options:
  2941. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  2942. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
  2943. specs.)
  2944. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2945. Remarks for more info.
  2946. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2947. Remarks:
  2948. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  2949. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2950. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2951. {^repid} | {0} Repository identifier.
  2952. {^repname} | {1} Repository name.
  2953. {^repserver} | {2} Server name.
  2954. {^repowner} | {3} Repository owner.
  2955. {^repguid} | {4} Unique identifier of the repository.
  2956. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2957. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2958. If the format parameter value is '^TABLE', the output will be printed
  2959. using a table format with the {^repid}, {^repname} and {^repserver} fields.
  2960. Examples:
  2961. cm ^repository
  2962. (Lists all repositories.)
  2963. cm ^repository ^list localhost:8084 --^format="{1, -20} {3}"
  2964. (Writes the repository name in 20 spaces, aligned to left, then a blank,
  2965. and then the repository owner.)
  2966. cm ^repository ^ls localhost:8084 --^format="{^repname, -20} {^repowner}"
  2967. (Writes the same as the previous example.)
  2968. cm ^repo ^ls localhost:8084 --^format=^TABLE
  2969. (Writes the list of repositories using a table format with the following
  2970. fields: repository id, repository name, and repository server name.)
  2971. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2972. Renames a repository.
  2973. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2974. Usage:
  2975. cm ^repository | ^repo ^rename [<repspec>] <new_name>
  2976. Options:
  2977. repspec Repository to be renamed.
  2978. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  2979. specifications.)
  2980. new_name New name for the repository.
  2981. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2982. Remarks:
  2983. This command renames a repository.
  2984. If no repspec is specified, current repository will be assumed.
  2985. Examples:
  2986. cm ^repository ^rename development
  2987. (The current repository will be renamed to 'development'.)
  2988. cm ^repo ^rename ^rep:default@SERVER:8084 development
  2989. (The 'default' repository on 'SERVER' will be renamed to 'development'.)
  2990. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  2991. Connects an existing repository by adding its database.
  2992. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  2993. Usage:
  2994. cm ^repository | ^repo ^add <db_file> <rep_name> <repserverspec>
  2995. Options:
  2996. db_file The name of the database file on the database backend.
  2997. rep_name The name of the repository.
  2998. repserverspec The repository server specification.
  2999. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  3000. server specifications.)
  3001. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  3002. Remarks:
  3003. Reconnects an existing repository database to the server. This command is
  3004. useful to move a repository from one server to another, or to restore an
  3005. archived repository after using the 'cm ^repository ^delete' command.
  3006. Examples:
  3007. cm ^repository ^add rep_27 myrepository myserver:8084
  3008. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  3009. Creates a new trigger on a server.
  3010. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  3011. Usage:
  3012. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^create | ^mk <subtype-type> <new_name> <script_path>
  3013. [--^position=<new_position>]
  3014. [--^filter=<str_filter>]
  3015. [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  3016. Options:
  3017. --^position New position of the specified trigger.
  3018. This position must not be in use by another trigger of
  3019. the same type.
  3020. --^filter Checks only items that matches the specified filter.
  3021. --^server Creates the trigger on the specified server.
  3022. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  3023. one configured on the client. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  3024. to learn more about repository server specifications.)
  3025. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  3026. (Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger types.)
  3027. new_name Name of the new trigger.
  3028. script_path Disk path on the server where the script to execute is
  3029. located. If the command line starts with "^webtrigger ",
  3030. the trigger will be considered as a web trigger. See
  3031. Remarks for more information.
  3032. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  3033. Remarks:
  3034. Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
  3035. as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
  3036. against the specified URI -where the request body contains a JSON
  3037. dictionary with the trigger environment variables- and a fixed INPUT key
  3038. pointing to an array of strings.
  3039. Examples:
  3040. cm ^trigger ^create ^after-setselector "BackupMgr" "/path/to/script" --^position=4
  3041. cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
  3042. cm ^tr ^mk ^after-mklabel Log "/path/to/script" --^filter="^rep:myRep,LB*"
  3043. (This trigger will be executed only if the label name starts with 'LB'
  3044. and it is being created in a repository called 'myRep'.)
  3045. cm ^tr ^mk ^after-checkin NotifyTeam "^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
  3046. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MOVE ==
  3047. Moves or renames a file or directory.
  3048. == CMD_USAGE_MOVE ==
  3049. Usage:
  3050. cm ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
  3051. [--^errorformat=<str_format>]
  3052. Options:
  3053. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  3054. Remarks for more info.
  3055. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message in a specific format. See
  3056. Remarks for more info.
  3057. src_path Source item path.
  3058. dst_path Destination item path.
  3059. == CMD_HELP_MOVE ==
  3060. Remarks:
  3061. This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
  3062. Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
  3063. If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
  3064. directory. In the first case, the file is renamed; otherwise, the item
  3065. is moved.
  3066. If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
  3067. The item to move or rename must exist.
  3068. Format:
  3069. {0} Source path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
  3070. {1} Destination path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
  3071. Examples:
  3072. cm ^move file.txt file.old
  3073. (Renames the item.)
  3074. cm ^mv .\file.old .\oldFiles
  3075. (Moves 'file.old' to 'oldFiles'.)
  3076. cm ^move .\src .\src2
  3077. (Renames a directory.)
  3078. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL ==
  3079. Allows the user to manage labels.
  3080. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL ==
  3081. Usage:
  3082. cm ^label | ^lb <command> [options]
  3083. Commands:
  3084. - ^create | ^mk
  3085. - ^delete | ^rm
  3086. - ^rename
  3087. To get more information about each command run:
  3088. cm ^label <command> --^usage
  3089. cm ^label <command> --^help
  3090. == CMD_HELP_LABEL ==
  3091. Examples:
  3092. cm ^label myNewLabel ^cs:42
  3093. ('^create' command is optional.)
  3094. cm ^label ^rename myNewLabel newLabelName
  3095. cm ^label ^delete newLabelName
  3096. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_CREATE ==
  3097. Applies a label to a changeset and creates the label if required.
  3098. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_CREATE ==
  3099. Usage:
  3100. cm ^label [^create] <lbspec> [<csetspec> | <wk_path>]
  3101. [--^allxlinkedrepositories]
  3102. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  3103. Options:
  3104. --^allxlinkedrepositories Creates the new label in all Xlinked repositories.
  3105. -^c Applies the specified comment to the new label.
  3106. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  3107. new label.
  3108. lbspec The new label name.
  3109. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  3110. specs.)
  3111. csetspec Name or full specification of the changeset to label.
  3112. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  3113. specs.)
  3114. wk_path Path of the workspace to label. (The changeset that the
  3115. workspace is pointing will be labeled.)
  3116. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_CREATE ==
  3117. Remarks:
  3118. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  3119. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  3120. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  3121. you to specify the comment.
  3122. Examples:
  3123. cm ^label ^create ^lb:BL001 ^cs:1203 -^commentsfile=commentlb001.txt
  3124. (Creates label 'BL001' attached to changeset 1203, and applies the comment
  3125. in the 'commentlb001.txt' file.)
  3126. cm ^label BL002 ^cs:1203 -^c="first release"
  3127. (Creates label 'BL002', with a comment, and attached to changeset 1203.)
  3128. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_DELETE ==
  3129. Deletes one or more labels.
  3130. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_DELETE ==
  3131. Usage:
  3132. cm ^label ^delete <lbspec>[ ...]
  3133. Options:
  3134. lbspec Label to delete. Use a whitespace to separate labels.
  3135. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  3136. specs.)
  3137. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_DELETE ==
  3138. Remarks:
  3139. This command deletes one or more labels.
  3140. Examples:
  3141. cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001
  3142. (Deletes the label 'BL001'.)
  3143. cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001 ^lb:BL002@reptest@server2:8084
  3144. (Deletes the labels 'BL001' and 'BL002'.)
  3145. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_RENAME ==
  3146. Renames a label.
  3147. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_RENAME ==
  3148. Usage:
  3149. cm ^label ^rename <lbspec> <new_name>
  3150. Options:
  3151. lbspec Label to rename.
  3152. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
  3153. new_name New name for the label.
  3154. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_RENAME ==
  3155. Remarks:
  3156. This command renames a label.
  3157. Examples:
  3158. cm ^label ^rename ^lb:BL001 BL002
  3159. (Renames the label 'BL001' to 'BL002'.)
  3160. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBJECTSPEC ==
  3161. Describes how to write object specs.
  3162. == CMD_USAGE_OBJECTSPEC ==
  3163. Usage:
  3164. cm ^objectspec
  3165. (To get all the information about how to build object specs.)
  3166. == CMD_HELP_OBJECTSPEC ==
  3167. Several Unity VCS commands expect 'object specs' as input to refer to a
  3168. given object (typically a branch, changeset, repository, etc).
  3169. This documentation describes the different "specs" available and how to
  3170. build them.
  3171. Each spec type begins with a unique tag, for example "^rep:" or "^cs:". The tag
  3172. must be specified for commands that take a general object spec, for example
  3173. "cm ^setowner object_spec", but can often be omitted for commands that take only
  3174. a single type of spec, for example, "cm ^getfile revision_spec".
  3175. Repository server spec (repserverspec):
  3176. ^repserver:name:port
  3177. Examples:
  3178. cm ^repo ^list ^repserver:skull:8084
  3179. cm ^repo ^list skull:8084
  3180. Side note:
  3181. We call it 'repository server spec', instead of just 'server spec' for
  3182. historical reasons. Long ago, we had separate workspace and repository
  3183. servers, and the naming survived.
  3184. Repository spec (repspec):
  3185. ^rep:rep_name@[repserverspec]
  3186. Examples:
  3187. cm ^showowner ^rep:codice@localhost:6060
  3188. (Here the "^rep:" is required because ^showowner admits not only repos
  3189. but also other types of objects. So it needs the user to indicate the
  3190. object type.)
  3191. Branch spec (brspec):
  3192. ^br:[/]br_name[@repspec]
  3193. Examples:
  3194. cm ^switch ^br:/main@^rep:plastic@^repserver:skull:9095
  3195. (In this case "^br:", "^rep" and "^repserver" are not needed, so the
  3196. command admits a much shorter form:
  3197. "cm ^switch main@plastic@skull:9095".)
  3198. cm ^find ^revisions "^where ^branch='^br:/main/task001'"
  3199. Remark:
  3200. The initial '/' on the branch is not mandatory. We used to specify all
  3201. our branches as /main, /main/task001, and so on. But now, we prefer the
  3202. shorter form main, main/task001 which makes commands more compact.
  3203. Changeset spec (csetspec):
  3204. ^cs:cs_number|cs_guid[@repspec]
  3205. The number or GUID of the changeset can be specified.
  3206. Examples:
  3207. cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@code@skull:7070
  3208. Label spec (labelspec):
  3209. ^lb:lb_name[@repspec]
  3210. Examples:
  3211. cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE2.0
  3212. cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE1.4@myrep@MYSERVER:8084
  3213. Revision spec:
  3214. There are different types of rev specs:
  3215. - ^rev: item_path[#(brspec|csetspec|labelspec)]
  3216. - ^rev: ^serverpath:item_path#(brspec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
  3217. - ^rev: ^revid:rev_id[@rep_spec]
  3218. - ^rev: ^itemid:item_id#(br_spec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
  3219. Examples:
  3220. cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
  3221. cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
  3222. ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
  3223. cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
  3224. Item spec:
  3225. There are different types of item specs:
  3226. - ^item: item_path
  3227. - ^item: ^itemid:item_id[@rep_spec]
  3228. Examples:
  3229. cm ^lock ^unlock ^item:audio.wav
  3230. cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:1234@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
  3231. Attribute spec:
  3232. ^att:att_name[@repspec]
  3233. Example:
  3234. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:merged@code@doe:8084 ^cs:25@code@doe:8084 done
  3235. Shelve spec:
  3236. ^sh:sh_number[@repspec]
  3237. Example:
  3238. cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
  3239. Workspace specs:
  3240. ^wk:name@clientmachine
  3241. Rarely used, since they only apply to workspace related commands. Useful to
  3242. specify the workspace by name and machine instead of path.
  3243. Examples:
  3244. cm ^showselector ^wk:codebase@modok
  3245. Side note:
  3246. These specs come from the old days of Plastic SCM 2.x where 'workspace
  3247. servers' existed as a way to store workspace metadata in a centralized
  3248. way. Were deprecated due to performance issues.
  3249. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL ==
  3250. Runs commands in a partial workspace.
  3251. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL ==
  3252. Usage:
  3253. cm ^partial <command> [options]
  3254. Commands:
  3255. - ^configure
  3256. - ^add
  3257. - ^undo
  3258. - ^checkout | ^co
  3259. - ^undocheckout | ^unco
  3260. - ^checkin | ^ci
  3261. - ^move | ^mv
  3262. - ^remove | ^rm
  3263. - ^switch | ^stb
  3264. - ^update | ^upd
  3265. - ^shelveset | ^shelve
  3266. To get more information about each command run:
  3267. cm ^partial <command> --^usage
  3268. cm ^partial <command> --^help
  3269. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL ==
  3270. Examples:
  3271. cm ^partial ^configure +/background-blue.png
  3272. cm ^partial ^update landscape-1024.png
  3273. cm ^partial ^checkin eyes-green.png eyes-black.png
  3274. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3275. Adds an item to version control.
  3276. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3277. Usage:
  3278. cm ^partial ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^parents]
  3279. [--^ignorefailed] [--^skipcontentcheck] <item_path>[ ...]
  3280. [--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
  3281. Options:
  3282. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Adds items recursively.
  3283. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3284. --^parents Includes the parent directories of the items specified
  3285. in the operation.
  3286. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
  3287. continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
  3288. added, its content is not added.
  3289. --^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
  3290. text or binary, it will be set as binary by default
  3291. instead of checking the content to detect the type.
  3292. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
  3293. the examples for more information.
  3294. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  3295. format. Check the examples for more information.
  3296. item_path Items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  3297. containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
  3298. Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
  3299. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3300. Remarks:
  3301. Requirements to add items:
  3302. - The parent directory of the item to add must be previously added.
  3303. Examples:
  3304. cm ^partial ^add pic1.png pic2.png
  3305. (Adds 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' items.)
  3306. cm ^partial ^add c:\workspace\picture.png
  3307. (Adds 'picture.png' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
  3308. cm ^partial ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
  3309. (Recursively adds 'src'.)
  3310. cm ^partial ^add --^parents samples\design01.png
  3311. (Adds 'design01.png' file and 'samples' parent folder.)
  3312. cm ^partial ^add -^R *
  3313. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
  3314. cm ^partial ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
  3315. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
  3316. '^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
  3317. could not be added.)
  3318. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3319. Stores changes in the repository.
  3320. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3321. Usage:
  3322. cm ^partial ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
  3323. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  3324. [--^all | -^a] [--^applychanged] [--^keeplock]
  3325. [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
  3326. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3327. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3328. Options:
  3329. -^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
  3330. checkin operation.
  3331. -^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
  3332. changeset created in the checkin operation.
  3333. --^all | -^a Includes also the items changed, moved, and deleted
  3334. locally on the specified paths.
  3335. --^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
  3336. detected in the workspace along with the checked out
  3337. items.
  3338. --^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
  3339. included.
  3340. --^keeplock Keeps the lock of the locked items after the checkin
  3341. operation.
  3342. --^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not to
  3343. the target.
  3344. --^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock,
  3345. a.k.a. exclusive checkout, cannot be adquired or
  3346. because local changes are in conflict with the server
  3347. changes) are discarded and the checkin operation
  3348. continues without them.
  3349. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3350. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3351. the lines should start.
  3352. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3353. the lines should end.
  3354. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3355. the fields should be separated.
  3356. item_path Items to checkin. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3357. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3358. paths. Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
  3359. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3360. Remarks:
  3361. - If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin will involve all the
  3362. pending changes in the workspace.
  3363. - The checkin operation always applies recursively from the given path.
  3364. - To checkin an item:
  3365. - The item must be under source code control.
  3366. - The item must be checked out.
  3367. - If the item is changed but not checked out, the '--^applychanged' flag
  3368. is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
  3369. wildcards ('*').
  3370. Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
  3371. checked in.
  3372. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  3373. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  3374. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  3375. you to specify the comment.
  3376. Reading input from stdin:
  3377. The '^partial ^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  3378. single dash "-".
  3379. Example:
  3380. cm ^partial ^checkin -
  3381. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  3382. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
  3383. Example:
  3384. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^partial ^checkin --^all -
  3385. (In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
  3386. Examples:
  3387. cm ^partial ^checkin figure.png landscape.png
  3388. (Applies the checkin to 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
  3389. cm ^partial ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
  3390. (Applies checkin to current directory and sets the comment from the
  3391. 'mycomment.txt' file.)
  3392. cm ^partial ^ci background.png -^c="my comment" --^keeplock
  3393. (Applies the checkin to 'background.png', includes a comment, and keeps the
  3394. lock.)
  3395. cm ^partial ^checkin --^applychanged
  3396. (Applies the checkin to all pending changes in the workspace.)
  3397. cm ^partial ^checkin link --^symlink
  3398. (Applies the checkin to the symlink file and not to the target.)
  3399. cm ^partial ^checkin . --^ignorefailed
  3400. (Applies checkin to current directory, ignoring the changes that cannot be
  3401. applied.)
  3402. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3403. Marks files as ready to modify.
  3404. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3405. Usage:
  3406. cm ^partial ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
  3407. [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  3408. Options:
  3409. item_path Items to checkout. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3410. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3411. paths.
  3412. Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
  3413. --^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
  3414. format.
  3415. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3416. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
  3417. cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
  3418. continue without it.
  3419. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3420. Remarks:
  3421. To checkout an item:
  3422. - The item must be under source code control.
  3423. - The item must be checked in.
  3424. If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
  3425. a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
  3426. and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
  3427. simultaneously checkout.
  3428. You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
  3429. Check the Administrator Guide to learn how locking works:
  3430. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/locking
  3431. Examples:
  3432. cm ^partial ^checkout pic1.png pic2.png
  3433. (Checkouts 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' files.)
  3434. cm ^partial ^co *.png
  3435. (Checkouts all png files.)
  3436. cm ^partial ^checkout .
  3437. (Checkouts current directory.)
  3438. cm ^partial ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
  3439. (Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
  3440. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3441. Allows you to configure your workspace by loading or unloading items from it.
  3442. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3443. Usage:
  3444. cm ^partial ^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  3445. [--^ignorecase] [--^restorefulldirs]
  3446. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3447. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3448. Options:
  3449. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3450. --^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the process. Incorrect paths
  3451. will not cause the command to stop.
  3452. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, '^configure'
  3453. will work for "/Data/Textures" even if the user writes
  3454. "/data/teXtures".
  3455. --^restorefulldirs Resets an invalid directory configuration (happens when
  3456. a non-partial operation is run on a partial workspace).
  3457. The directories in this list will be fully configured
  3458. (full check) which means they will automatically
  3459. download new content during the update.
  3460. This operation does not download any files, just
  3461. restores the directory configuration on partial
  3462. workspaces.
  3463. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3464. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3465. the lines should start.
  3466. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3467. the lines should end.
  3468. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3469. the fields should be separated.
  3470. path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ") to
  3471. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3472. paths. Paths have to start with "/".
  3473. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3474. Remarks:
  3475. The command assumes recursive operation.
  3476. Examples:
  3477. cm ^partial ^configure +/landscape_grey.png
  3478. (Loads 'landscape_grey.png' item.)
  3479. cm ^partial ^configure -/landscape_black.png
  3480. (Unloads 'landscape_black.png' item.)
  3481. cm ^partial ^configure +/soft -/soft/soft-black.png
  3482. (Loads all 'soft' directory children items except 'soft-black.png'.)
  3483. cm ^partial ^configure -/
  3484. (Unloads the whole workspace.)
  3485. cm ^partial ^configure -/ +/
  3486. (Loads the whole workspace.)
  3487. cm ^partial ^configure -/figure-64.png --^ignorefailed
  3488. (Unloads 'figure-64.png' item even if it was already unloaded.)
  3489. cm ^partial ^configure +/ --^restorefulldirs
  3490. (Sets all directories to automatically download the new content.)
  3491. cm ^partial ^configure +/src/lib --^restorefulldirs
  3492. (Sets only '/src/lib' and its subdirectories to automatically download the
  3493. new content.)
  3494. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3495. Moves or renames a file or directory.
  3496. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3497. Usage:
  3498. cm ^partial ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
  3499. Options:
  3500. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  3501. Remarks for more info.
  3502. src_path Source item path.
  3503. dst_path Destination item path.
  3504. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3505. Remarks:
  3506. This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
  3507. Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
  3508. If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
  3509. directory. In the first case, the file will be renamed; otherwise, the item
  3510. will be moved.
  3511. If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
  3512. The item to move or rename must exist.
  3513. Format:
  3514. {0} Source path.
  3515. {1} Destination path.
  3516. Examples:
  3517. cm ^partial ^move file.png file-blue.png
  3518. (Renames the item.)
  3519. cm ^partial ^mv .\file-blue.png .\blueFiles
  3520. (Moves 'file-blue.png' to 'blueFiles'.)
  3521. cm ^partial ^move .\design .\marketing
  3522. (Renames a directory.)
  3523. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
  3524. Deletes a file or directory from version control.
  3525. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
  3526. Usage:
  3527. cm ^partial ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^nodisk]
  3528. Options:
  3529. --^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on disk.
  3530. item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to
  3531. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3532. paths.
  3533. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
  3534. Remarks:
  3535. Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
  3536. directory in the source code control.
  3537. Requirements:
  3538. - The item must be under source code control.
  3539. Examples:
  3540. cm ^partial ^remove src
  3541. (Removes 'src'. If 'src' is a directory, this is the same that:
  3542. cm ^partial ^remove -^R src.)
  3543. cm ^partial ^remove c:\workspace\pic01.png --^nodisk
  3544. (Removes 'pic01.png' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
  3545. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
  3546. Allows the user to manage partial shelvesets.
  3547. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
  3548. Usage:
  3549. cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve <command> [options]
  3550. Commands:
  3551. - ^create | ^mk
  3552. - ^apply
  3553. - ^delete | ^rm
  3554. To get more information about each command run:
  3555. cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^usage
  3556. cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^help
  3557. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
  3558. Examples:
  3559. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
  3560. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply sh:3
  3561. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete sh:5
  3562. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  3563. Shelves chosen pending changes.
  3564. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  3565. Usage:
  3566. cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]]
  3567. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  3568. [--^applychanged] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
  3569. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3570. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3571. Options:
  3572. -^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
  3573. shelve operation.
  3574. -^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
  3575. changeset created in the shelve operation.
  3576. --^applychanged Applies the shelve operation to the changed items
  3577. detected in the workspace along with the checked out
  3578. items.
  3579. --^symlink Applies the shelve operation to the symlink and not to
  3580. the target.
  3581. --^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock
  3582. (a.k.a. exclusive checkout) cannot be adquired or
  3583. because local changes are in conflict with the server
  3584. changes) are discarded and the shelve operation
  3585. continues without them.
  3586. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3587. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3588. the lines should start.
  3589. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3590. the lines should end.
  3591. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  3592. the fields should be separated.
  3593. item_path Items to shelve. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3594. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3595. paths. Use . to apply shelve to current directory.
  3596. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  3597. The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items
  3598. inside the repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
  3599. checkin the files.
  3600. Remarks:
  3601. If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
  3602. include all the pending changes in the workspace.
  3603. The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from
  3604. the given path.
  3605. The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is the default, which means that,
  3606. if no other operation is defined, the command will try to perform a creation.
  3607. Requirements to shelve an item:
  3608. - The item must be under source code control.
  3609. - The item must be checked out or changed.
  3610. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  3611. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  3612. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  3613. you to specify the comment.
  3614. Examples:
  3615. cm ^partial ^shelveset figure.png landscape.png
  3616. (Creates a new shelveset with 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
  3617. cm ^partial ^shelveset . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
  3618. (Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory
  3619. and sets the comment from the 'mycomment.txt' file.)
  3620. cm ^partial ^shelve background.png -^c="my comment"
  3621. (Creates a new shelveset with 'background.png', includes a comment.)
  3622. cm ^partial ^shelveset --^applychanged
  3623. (Creates a new shelveset all pending changes in the workspace.)
  3624. cm ^partial ^shelveset link --^symlink
  3625. (Creates a new shelveset with the symlink file and not the target.)
  3626. cm ^partial ^shelveset . --^ignorefailed
  3627. (Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory,
  3628. ignoring (skipping) the changes that cannot be applied.)
  3629. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  3630. Applies a stored shelveset.
  3631. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  3632. Usage:
  3633. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [--^encoding=<name>]
  3634. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
  3635. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  3636. Options:
  3637. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  3638. See the MSDN documentation at
  3639. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  3640. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  3641. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  3642. --^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
  3643. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  3644. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  3645. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  3646. The '^partial ^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
  3647. Remarks:
  3648. Comparison methods:
  3649. ^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
  3650. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  3651. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  3652. ^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  3653. Examples:
  3654. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
  3655. (Applies a stored shelve.)
  3656. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  3657. Deletes a shelveset.
  3658. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  3659. Usage:
  3660. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
  3661. Options:
  3662. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  3663. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  3664. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  3665. The '^partial ^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
  3666. Examples:
  3667. cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
  3668. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  3669. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3670. Sets a branch as the working branch.
  3671. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3672. Usage:
  3673. cm ^switch <branch_spec> [--^report | --^silent] [--^workspace=<path>]
  3674. [--^noinput]
  3675. (Sets the working branch and updates the workspace.)
  3676. cm ^switch <branch_spec> --^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent]
  3677. [--^ignorefailed] [--^ignorecase] [--^workspace=<path>]
  3678. (Sets the working branch and runs a workspace configuration like the 'cm
  3679. ^partial ^configure' command does.)
  3680. Options:
  3681. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3682. --^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
  3683. is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
  3684. This option only works when the '--^configure' option
  3685. is not specified.
  3686. --^configure Configures (loads / unloads items) the workspace
  3687. after updating the working branch. Check 'cm ^partial
  3688. ^configure --^help' to learn how to specify the paths
  3689. to configure.
  3690. --^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the configuration process.
  3691. Incorrect paths will not cause the command to stop.
  3692. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, option
  3693. '--^configure' works for "/Data/Textures" even if the user
  3694. writes "/data/teXtures".
  3695. --^noinput Skips the interactive question to continue the
  3696. operation shelving the pending changes.
  3697. --^workspace=path Path where the workspace is located.
  3698. branch_spec Branch specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  3699. more about branch specs.)
  3700. path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ")
  3701. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3702. separate paths. Paths must start with "/".
  3703. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3704. Remarks:
  3705. This command allows users to update the working branch. After updating the
  3706. branch, the command updates the workspace to the new branch as the
  3707. 'cm ^partial ^update' command would do. However, if the '--^configure' option is
  3708. specified, the command allows to configure the workspace using the new
  3709. branch configuration as the 'cm ^partial ^configure' command would do.
  3710. Examples:
  3711. cm ^switch ^br:/main/task
  3712. (Sets /main/task as working branch and updates the workspace.)
  3713. cm ^switch ^br:/main/task --^configure +/art/images
  3714. (Sets /main/task as working branch and configures the workspace to
  3715. load the /art/images folder.)
  3716. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  3717. Undoes the checkout on an item.
  3718. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  3719. Usage:
  3720. cm ^partial ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [--^silent]
  3721. [--^keepchanges | -^k]
  3722. Options:
  3723. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3724. --^keepchanges (-^k) Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
  3725. Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
  3726. changed with the same content on disk that it was.
  3727. This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
  3728. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use double quotes (" ")
  3729. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3730. separate paths. Use . to apply the operation to current
  3731. directory.
  3732. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  3733. Remarks:
  3734. If an item is checked-out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
  3735. the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
  3736. out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
  3737. Requirements:
  3738. - The item must be under source code control.
  3739. - The item must be checked out.
  3740. Examples:
  3741. cm ^partial ^undocheckout .
  3742. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
  3743. cm ^partial ^undocheckout pic1.png pic2.png
  3744. cm ^unco c:\workspace\design01.png
  3745. (Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
  3746. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3747. Undoes changes in a workspace.
  3748. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3749. Usage:
  3750. cm ^partial ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive]
  3751. [<filter>[ ...]]
  3752. [--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3753. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3754. Options:
  3755. --^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
  3756. to the target.
  3757. -^r | --^recursive Executes the undo recursively.
  3758. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3759. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3760. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3761. how the lines should start.
  3762. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3763. how the lines should end.
  3764. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3765. how the fields should be separated.
  3766. --^checkedout Select checked-out files and directories.
  3767. --^unchanged Select files whose content is unchanged.
  3768. --^changed Select locally changed or checked-out files and
  3769. directories.
  3770. --^deleted Select deleted files and directories.
  3771. --^moved Select moved files and directories.
  3772. --^added Select added files and directories.
  3773. path Path of the files or directories to apply the
  3774. operation to. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3775. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3776. separate paths.
  3777. If no path is specified, by default the undo
  3778. operation will take all of the files in the current
  3779. directory.
  3780. filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given
  3781. paths. Use a whitespace to separate filters. See the
  3782. Filters section for more information.
  3783. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3784. Remarks:
  3785. The ^undo command is dangerous - it undoes work in an irreversible way.
  3786. Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous state
  3787. of the files and directories affected by it. If no path is specified
  3788. in the arguments, by default it will undo every change in the current
  3789. directory, but not recursively.
  3790. These are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
  3791. - src
  3792. - file.txt
  3793. - code.cs
  3794. - /test
  3795. - test_a.py
  3796. - test_b.py
  3797. cm ^partial ^undo
  3798. cm ^partial ^undo *
  3799. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
  3800. cm ^partial ^undo .
  3801. cm ^partial ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
  3802. If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
  3803. To undo all of the changes below a directory (including changes affecting
  3804. the directory itself):
  3805. cm ^partial ^undo dirpath -^r
  3806. If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
  3807. undone.
  3808. Filters:
  3809. If no flag is specified, by default, all changes are undone, but the
  3810. paths can be filtered using one or more of the flags below.
  3811. If a file or directory matches one or more of the specified kinds of change,
  3812. all of the changes on said file or directory will be undone.
  3813. For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file is
  3814. both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
  3815. Examples:
  3816. cm ^partial ^undo . -^r
  3817. (Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
  3818. from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
  3819. cm ^partial ^co file.txt
  3820. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3821. (Undoes the checkout on file.txt.)
  3822. ^echo ^content >> file.txt
  3823. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3824. (Undoes the local change to file.txt.)
  3825. cm ^partial ^undo src
  3826. (Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
  3827. cm ^partial ^undo src/*
  3828. (Undo changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
  3829. affecting src.)
  3830. cm ^partial ^undo *.cs
  3831. (Undo changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  3832. directory.)
  3833. cm ^partial ^undo *.cs -^r
  3834. (Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  3835. directory and every directory below it.)
  3836. cm ^partial ^co file1.txt file2.txt
  3837. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  3838. cm ^partial ^undo --^unchanged
  3839. (Undoes the checkout of unchanged file2.txt, ignoring locally changed
  3840. file1.txt.)
  3841. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  3842. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  3843. cm ^partial ^co file1.txt
  3844. cm ^partial ^undo --^checkedout
  3845. (Undoes the changes in checked-out file file1.txt, ignoring file2.txt as it is
  3846. not checked-out.)
  3847. cm ^partial ^add file.txt
  3848. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3849. (Undoes the add of file.txt, making it once again a private file.)
  3850. ^rm file1.txt
  3851. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  3852. cm ^partial ^add file3.txt
  3853. cm ^partial ^undo --^deleted --^added *
  3854. (Undoes the file1.txt delete and file3.txt add, ignoring the file2.txt
  3855. change.)
  3856. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3857. Updates the partial workspace and downloads latest changes.
  3858. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3859. Usage:
  3860. cm ^partial ^update [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^changeset=<number>]
  3861. [--^silent | --^report] [--^dontmerge]
  3862. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  3863. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3864. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3865. Options:
  3866. --^changeset Updates the partial workspace to a specific changeset.
  3867. --^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
  3868. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard
  3869. output. It is possible to specify an output file.
  3870. --^encoding Used with the '--xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  3871. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  3872. See the MSDN documentation at
  3873. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  3874. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  3875. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  3876. By default "utf-8" will be assigned.
  3877. --^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
  3878. is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
  3879. --^dontmerge Does not merge the file conflicts, it just skips them.
  3880. The other changes are properly applied. This option can
  3881. be useful for automation to avoid user interaction.
  3882. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3883. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  3884. specifies how the lines should start.
  3885. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  3886. specifies how the lines should end.
  3887. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  3888. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  3889. item_path Items to be updated. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3890. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3891. paths. Use . to apply update to current directory.
  3892. If no path is specified, then the current partial
  3893. workspace is fully updated.
  3894. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3895. Remarks:
  3896. The '^partial ^update' command updates the out-of-date files.
  3897. The command assumes recursive operation.
  3898. If all the specified paths are files inside the same Xlink when using the
  3899. '--^changeset' option, then the versions to download are searched in the
  3900. specified changeset of the Xlinked repository.
  3901. Examples:
  3902. cm ^partial ^update
  3903. (Updates all in the current partial workspace.)
  3904. cm ^partial ^update .
  3905. (Updates all current directory children items.)
  3906. cm ^partial ^update backgroud-blue.png
  3907. (Updates 'backgroud-blue.png' item.)
  3908. cm ^partial ^update soft_black.png soft-grey.png
  3909. (Updates 'soft_black.png' and 'soft-grey.png' items.)
  3910. cm ^partial ^update src --^report
  3911. (Updates all 'src' directory children items, printing the applied changes
  3912. list at the end.)
  3913. cm ^partial ^update src --^changeset=4
  3914. (Updates all 'src' directory children items to the content they loaded
  3915. in the changeset 4.)
  3916. cm ^partial ^update xlink/first.png --^changeset=4
  3917. (Updates 'xlink/first.png' item to the content it loaded in the changeset 4
  3918. of the Xlinked repository.)
  3919. cm ^partial ^update . --^changeset=2 --^xml=output.xml 2>errors.txt
  3920. (Updates all current directory children items to the content they loaded
  3921. in the changeset 2, reporting the result in XML format. The output is stored
  3922. in a file named 'output.xml' and errors are redirected to the file 'errors.txt'.
  3923. NOTE: redirection syntax rely on the shell.)
  3924. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PATCH ==
  3925. Generates a patch file from a spec or applies a generated patch to the current
  3926. workspace.
  3927. == CMD_USAGE_PATCH ==
  3928. Usage:
  3929. cm ^patch <source_spec> [<source_spec>] [--^output=<output_file>]
  3930. [--^tool=<path_to_diff>]
  3931. (Generates a patch file that contains the differences of a branch,
  3932. a changeset, or the differences between changesets. It also tracks
  3933. differences of text and binary files.)
  3934. cm ^patch --^apply <patch_file> [--^tool=<path_to_patch>]
  3935. (Allows to apply the contents of a generated patch file in the current
  3936. workspace.)
  3937. Options:
  3938. --^output Sets the output file of the patch command.
  3939. --^tool Sets the application to use (diff or patch).
  3940. source_spec Full spec of a changeset or a branch. (Use
  3941. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  3942. output_file File to save the patch content. It no file is specified,
  3943. the patch content will be printed on standard output.
  3944. patch_file Patch file to apply in the current workspace.
  3945. == CMD_HELP_PATCH ==
  3946. Limitations:
  3947. If the output patch file already exists, the command will not overwrite it.
  3948. When applying a patch, the command will not apply changes to modified files
  3949. if they are not present on disk.
  3950. Important:
  3951. This command requires Diff and Patch tools, publicly available at
  3952. http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/patch.htm and
  3953. http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/diffutils.htm
  3954. Once installed, it's recommended to add their location to the PATH
  3955. environment variable.
  3956. Examples:
  3957. cm ^patch ^cs:4@default@localhost:8084
  3958. (Prints on console the differences of cset 4 in unified format.)
  3959. cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch
  3960. (Generates a patch file with the differences of branch "main".)
  3961. cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\diff.exe
  3962. (Same as above, using a custom exe.)
  3963. cm ^patch ^cs:2@default ^cs:4@default
  3964. (Prints on console the differences between csets 2 and 4 in unified format.)
  3965. cm ^patch --^apply file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\patch.exe
  3966. (Applies the patch in 'file.patch' to the local workspace with a custom exe.)
  3967. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE ==
  3968. Allows the user to manage server connection profiles.
  3969. == CMD_USAGE_PROFILE ==
  3970. Usage:
  3971. cm ^profile <command> [options]
  3972. Commands:
  3973. - ^list | ^ls
  3974. - ^create | ^mk
  3975. - ^delete | ^rm
  3976. To get more information about each command run:
  3977. cm ^profile <command> --^usage
  3978. cm ^profile <command> --^help
  3979. == CMD_HELP_PROFILE ==
  3980. Examples:
  3981. cm ^profile
  3982. cm ^profile ^list
  3983. cm ^profile ^create
  3984. cm ^profile ^delete 1
  3985. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_LIST ==
  3986. Lists the server connection profiles configured on the client.
  3987. == CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_LIST ==
  3988. Usage:
  3989. cm ^profile [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
  3990. Options:
  3991. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
  3992. See Remarks for more info.
  3993. == CMD_HELP_PROFILE_LIST ==
  3994. Remarks:
  3995. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  3996. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  3997. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  3998. {^index} | {0} Profile index in the profiles list
  3999. {^name} | {1} Profile name
  4000. {^server} | {2} Profile server
  4001. {^user} | {3} Profile user
  4002. {^workingmode} | {4} Profile working mode
  4003. {^securityconfig} | {5} Profile security config
  4004. {^tab} Inserts a tab space
  4005. {^newline} Inserts a new line
  4006. Examples:
  4007. cm ^profile
  4008. (Lists all the profiles using the default format)
  4009. cm ^profile --^format="{index,2} {server,-20}"
  4010. (Writes the profile index in 2 spaces, aligned to the right, then two blanks,
  4011. and then the repository server in 20 spaces, aligned to the left.)
  4012. cm ^profile --^format="{0,2} {2,-20}"
  4013. (Writes the same output as the previous example.)
  4014. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_CREATE ==
  4015. Creates a new server connection profile.
  4016. == CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_CREATE ==
  4017. Usage:
  4018. cm ^profile [^create | ^mk]
  4019. (Creates a new profile interactively.)
  4020. cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
  4021. --^password=<password> --^workingmode=<workingmode>
  4022. (Creates a new server connection profile using a user/password
  4023. authentication mode.)
  4024. cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
  4025. --^token=<token> --^workingmode=SSOWorkingMode
  4026. (Creates a new server connection profile using Single Sign On authentication
  4027. mode.)
  4028. Options:
  4029. --^server Creates the connection profile for the specified server.
  4030. --^username The username that should be used in the connection profile
  4031. --^password The plain-text password that should be used in the connection
  4032. profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
  4033. that are based on a user and password.
  4034. --^token The plain-text token that should be used in the connection
  4035. profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
  4036. that are based on a token (SSOWorkingMode for now).
  4037. --^workingmode The target server's authentication mode.
  4038. Available users/security working modes:
  4039. ^LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
  4040. ^UPWorkingMode (User and password)
  4041. ^SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
  4042. == CMD_HELP_PROFILE_CREATE ==
  4043. Remarks:
  4044. When using this command interactively (without options), the client will try
  4045. to connect to the server to obtain the working mode and check the credentials.
  4046. This guarantees that the resulting profile is correct.
  4047. When specifying the options, the client will generate the connection profile
  4048. without connecting to the server. This is useful when creating connection
  4049. profiles for automation purposes.
  4050. Examples:
  4051. cm ^profile ^create
  4052. (Creates a new connection profile interactively.)
  4053. cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
  4054. --^password=thisissupersecret --^workingmode=LDAPWorkingMode
  4055. (Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
  4056. using user 'sergio' and password 'thisissupersecret' through LDAP working mode.)
  4057. cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
  4058. --^token="TOKENAMoKJ9iAA(...)12fssoprov:unityid" --workingmode=^SSOWorkingMode
  4059. (Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
  4060. using user 'sergio' and the specified token through Single Sign On working mode.)
  4061. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_DELETE ==
  4062. Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
  4063. == CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_DELETE ==
  4064. Usage:
  4065. cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm <index | name>
  4066. cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --^index=<index>
  4067. cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --^name=<name>
  4068. Options:
  4069. --^index Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
  4070. --^name Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
  4071. index Profile index in the profiles list.
  4072. name Profile name.
  4073. == CMD_HELP_PROFILE_DELETE ==
  4074. Remarks:
  4075. Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
  4076. It works both with the profile index and the profile name.
  4077. The 'cm ^profile ^list' command does not show profile names by default,
  4078. check 'cm ^profile ^list --help' to check how to output profile's name.
  4079. Example:
  4080. cm ^profile ^delete 1
  4081. (Removes the profile at index 1.)
  4082. cm ^profile ^delete 192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode
  4083. (Removes the profile with name '192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode'.)
  4084. cm ^profile ^delete --name=12
  4085. (Removes the profile with name '12'.)
  4086. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_QUERY ==
  4087. Executes SQL queries. Requires SQL storage.
  4088. == CMD_USAGE_QUERY ==
  4089. Usage:
  4090. cm ^query <sql_command> [--^outputfile=<output_file>]
  4091. [--^solveuser=<column_name>[,...]]
  4092. [--^solvepath=<column_name>[,...]]
  4093. [--^columnwidth=<value>] [--^nocolumnname]
  4094. [--^columnseparator=<sep>] [--^repository=<name>]
  4095. Options:
  4096. --^outputfile Writes the result in an output file.
  4097. --^solveuser Sets the specified columns as username columns. The
  4098. query interpreter will assume that data of these columns
  4099. will be users, and will try to solve them.
  4100. --^solvepath Sets the specified columns as itemid column. The query
  4101. interpreter will try to solve item id to filesystem
  4102. paths.
  4103. --^columnwidth Specifies the width of each column to format the output.
  4104. --^nocolumnname Does not print column name.
  4105. --^columnseparator Uses char as column separator instead of a tab (\t).
  4106. --^repository Repository to query.
  4107. sql_command The sql query to be executed.
  4108. == CMD_HELP_QUERY ==
  4109. Remarks:
  4110. This command allows users to execute SQL queries in the server database.
  4111. In order to write SQL queries, use these two pre-defined functions to manage
  4112. users and paths:
  4113. - '^SolveUser(<username>)' that resolves a username into Unity VCS format.
  4114. - '^SolvePath(<path>)' that resolves a disk path into an item id.
  4115. Also, you can use options to show query results in a human readable form.
  4116. You can use the options '--^solveuser=<column_name>' and
  4117. '--^solvepath=<column_name>' to specify columns that query interpreter
  4118. must convert to a legible text. You can specify more than one column name,
  4119. comma separated.
  4120. Examples:
  4121. cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision" --^columnwidth=25 --^repository=reptest
  4122. (Retrieves data from 'revision' table from repository 'reptest'.)
  4123. cm ^query "^SELECT b.^sname ^as br_name, o.^dtimestamp ^as date ^from ^branch b, \
  4124. ^object o, ^seid s ^where b.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and \
  4125. s.^scode='^SolveUser(john)'" --^outputfile=query.txt
  4126. (Outputs into a file the branches with owner 'john'.)
  4127. cm ^query "^select r.^iobjid, r.^fiditem ^as path, s.^scode ^as username ^FROM \
  4128. ^revision r, ^object o, ^seid s ^WHERE r.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and \
  4129. o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and o.^dtimestamp>04/25/2014" \
  4130. --^solveuser=username --^solvepath=path --^repository=reptest@server2:9095
  4131. (Retrieves selected data from selected repository.)
  4132. cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision ^WHERE ^fiditem=^SolvePath(c:\mywkpath\info)"
  4133. (Retrieves all revision data of path 'info'.)
  4134. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  4135. Deletes one or more attributes.
  4136. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  4137. Usage:
  4138. cm ^attribute | ^att ^delete | ^rm <att_spec>[ ...]
  4139. Options:
  4140. att_spec Attributes to delete. Use a whitespace to separate
  4141. attributes.
  4142. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about attribute
  4143. specs.)
  4144. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  4145. Remarks:
  4146. This command removes one or more attributes.
  4147. Examples:
  4148. cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
  4149. (Deletes the attribute 'status'.)
  4150. cm ^att ^rm status ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084
  4151. (Deletes the attributes 'status' and 'integrated'.)
  4152. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  4153. Unsets an object's attribute.
  4154. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  4155. Usage:
  4156. cm ^attribute | ^att ^unset <att_spec> <object_spec>
  4157. att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  4158. learn more about attribute specs.)
  4159. object_spec Specification of the object to remove the attribute
  4160. from. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
  4161. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  4162. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4163. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  4164. Remarks:
  4165. The command unsets an attribute that was previously set on an object. It
  4166. does not delete the attribute object itself.
  4167. Examples:
  4168. cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
  4169. (Removes attribute realization 'status' from branch 'main/SCM105'.)
  4170. cm ^att ^unset ^att:integrated@reptest@localhost:8084 ^cs:25@reptest@localhost:8084
  4171. (Removes attribute realization 'integrated' from changeset 25, all in
  4172. repository 'reptest'.)
  4173. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  4174. Renames an attribute.
  4175. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  4176. Usage:
  4177. cm ^attribute | ^att ^rename <att_spec> <new_name>
  4178. att_spec Attribute to rename. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  4179. more about attribute specs.)
  4180. new_name New name for the attribute.
  4181. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  4182. Remarks:
  4183. This command renames an attribute.
  4184. Examples:
  4185. cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status state
  4186. (Renames the attribute 'status' to 'state'.)
  4187. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  4188. Edits the comment of an attribute.
  4189. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  4190. Usage:
  4191. cm ^attribute | ^att ^edit <att_spec> <new_comment>
  4192. Options:
  4193. att_spec Attribute to change its comment. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  4194. to learn more about attribute specs.)
  4195. new_comment New comment for the attribute. You can also specify a
  4196. default list of values for the attribute. See Remarks for
  4197. more info.
  4198. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  4199. Remarks:
  4200. This command changes the comment of an attribute.
  4201. To specify a default list of values for the attribute, you just need to
  4202. include a line like the following in the attribute comment:
  4203. 'default: value_one, "value two", value3, "Final value"'.
  4204. Examples:
  4205. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "The status of a branch in the CI pipeline."
  4206. (Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'.)
  4207. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of a branch. default: open, resolved, reviewed"
  4208. (Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'. And also specifies a list of
  4209. values. So when you set the attribute 'status' to an object, you can select
  4210. one of the following values: "open", "resolved", or "reviewed".)
  4211. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PULL ==
  4212. Pulls a branch from another repo.
  4213. == CMD_USAGE_PULL ==
  4214. Usage:
  4215. cm ^pull <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
  4216. [--^preview] [--^nodata] [TranslateOptions]
  4217. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4218. (Direct server-to-server replication. Pulls a branch from a repository.)
  4219. cm ^pull <dst_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
  4220. (Package based replication. Imports the package in the destination repository.)
  4221. cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_br_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
  4222. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4223. (Introduces the missing data for all the changesets of a branch previously
  4224. replicated with '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified,
  4225. Unity VCS tries to use the "replication source" (origin of the replicated
  4226. branch)).
  4227. cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_cs_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
  4228. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4229. (Introduces the missing data for a changeset previously replicated with
  4230. '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified, Unity VCS tries
  4231. to use the "replication source").
  4232. Options:
  4233. --^preview Gives information about what changes will be pulled but
  4234. no changes are actually performed. This option is useful
  4235. to check the data that will be transferred before
  4236. replicating changes.
  4237. --^nodata Replicates the branch changes without replicating the
  4238. data. This option is not allowed with package
  4239. replication.
  4240. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  4241. different in source and destination and there is not a
  4242. profile to authenticate to destination.
  4243. --^package Specifies the previously created package file to import
  4244. for package based replication. Useful to move data between
  4245. servers when there is no direct network connection. Refer to
  4246. 'cm ^push' to create a package file.
  4247. src_br_spec The branch to pull from a remote repository.
  4248. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  4249. dst_br_spec The branch to hydrate.
  4250. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  4251. dst_cs_spec The changeset to hydrate.
  4252. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset specs.)
  4253. dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
  4254. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository specs.)
  4255. TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
  4256. AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more information.
  4257. Translate options:
  4258. Mode:
  4259. --^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
  4260. The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
  4261. modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
  4262. the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
  4263. values:
  4264. ^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
  4265. ^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
  4266. ^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
  4267. (see below).
  4268. Specifics if mode is set to "table":
  4269. --^trtable=<translation_table_file>
  4270. If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
  4271. containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
  4272. branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
  4273. a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
  4274. to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  4275. Authentication options:
  4276. Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
  4277. - Using authentication parameters.
  4278. - Using an authentication file.
  4279. Using authentication parameters:
  4280. --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
  4281. Where --^authmode can take one of the following values
  4282. - ^NameWorkingMode
  4283. - ^LDAPWorkingMode
  4284. - ^ADWorkingMode
  4285. - ^UPWorkingMode
  4286. Examples:
  4287. (^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4288. (^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  4289. The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
  4290. in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
  4291. file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS GUI in the replication
  4292. profiles tab under Preferences.
  4293. If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
  4294. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
  4295. Using an authentication file:
  4296. It's possible to have a different file for each server you connect to,
  4297. with the credentials for that server and --^authfile=<authentication_file>
  4298. where the authentication_file must be formed by the following 2 lines:
  4299. 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
  4300. 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
  4301. == CMD_HELP_PULL ==
  4302. Remarks:
  4303. The '^pull' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
  4304. changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
  4305. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  4306. There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
  4307. A '^pull' operation means that the replication operation will demand data
  4308. from the source repository to be stored into the destination repository.
  4309. The client will connect to the destination repository and, from that host,
  4310. it will establish a connection to the source repository to retrieve the
  4311. targeted data. During pull it is the destination server which will be
  4312. connected to the source.
  4313. Although in a typical distributed scenario a developer pushes data from his
  4314. local server to the main server, the developer might want to pull the latest
  4315. repository updates from the main server, too.
  4316. Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have been made
  4317. on the same branch on two replicated repositories:
  4318. - Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
  4319. than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
  4320. changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
  4321. - Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
  4322. correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
  4323. is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
  4324. scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
  4325. changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
  4326. being able to push again.
  4327. Pull can work in two modes:
  4328. 1) Direct communication between servers: The destination server will fetch
  4329. the data from the source server, automatically synchronizing data for
  4330. the specified branch. It requires the user running the command to be
  4331. authenticated by the remote server, either using the default authentication
  4332. in the client.conf file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata'
  4333. modifiers, or '--^authmode' and '--^user' and '--^password' if the authentication
  4334. mode is ^UPWorkingMode.
  4335. 2) Import a previously generated package with push and the '--^package' option.
  4336. This mode requires using a package file previously generated with the push
  4337. command.
  4338. Keep in mind that pull replication works in an indirect way. When executed,
  4339. the command asks the destination repository to connect to the source and
  4340. obtain the selected branch.
  4341. However, this can be done directly by using the push command. This will make
  4342. the command replicate the selected branch from source to destination.
  4343. Examples:
  4344. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084
  4345. (Pulls the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver'. In this case,
  4346. both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
  4347. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
  4348. --^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4349. (Pulls the same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
  4350. to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
  4351. from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
  4352. integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
  4353. password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
  4354. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
  4355. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
  4356. (Pulls the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
  4357. server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
  4358. Unity VCS.)
  4359. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 --^nodata
  4360. (Replicates the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver' without data.)
  4361. cm ^pull ^hydrate ^br:/main@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  4362. (Hydrates all the changesets in the 'main' branch obtaining the data from
  4363. the remote server.)
  4364. cm ^pull ^hydrate ^cs:122169@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  4365. (Hydrates changeset 122169 in 'myserver' obtaining the data from the remote
  4366. server.)
  4367. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PUSH ==
  4368. Pushes a branch to another repo.
  4369. == CMD_USAGE_PUSH ==
  4370. Usage:
  4371. cm ^push <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
  4372. [--^preview] [TranslateOptions]
  4373. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4374. (Direct server-to-server replication. Pushes a branch from a repository.)
  4375. cm ^push <src_br_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
  4376. (Package based replication. Creates a replication package in the source
  4377. server with the selected branch.)
  4378. Options:
  4379. --^preview Gives information about what changes will be pushed,
  4380. but no changes are actually performed. This option is
  4381. useful to check the data that will be transferred before
  4382. replicating changes.
  4383. --^package Specifies path for exporting replication package for
  4384. package based replication.
  4385. Useful to move data between servers when there is no
  4386. direct network connection.
  4387. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  4388. different in source and destination and there is not a
  4389. profile to authenticate to destination.
  4390. src_br_spec The branch to push to a remote repository.
  4391. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  4392. dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
  4393. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4394. specs.)
  4395. TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
  4396. AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more information.
  4397. Translate options:
  4398. Mode:
  4399. --^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
  4400. The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
  4401. modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
  4402. the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
  4403. values:
  4404. ^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
  4405. ^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
  4406. ^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
  4407. (see below).
  4408. Specifics if mode is set to "table":
  4409. --^trtable=<translation_table_file>
  4410. If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
  4411. containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
  4412. branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
  4413. a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
  4414. to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  4415. Authentication options:
  4416. Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
  4417. - Using authentication parameters.
  4418. - Using an authentication file.
  4419. Using authentication parameters:
  4420. --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
  4421. Where --^authmode can take one of the following values
  4422. - ^NameWorkingMode
  4423. - ^LDAPWorkingMode
  4424. - ^ADWorkingMode
  4425. - ^UPWorkingMode
  4426. Examples:
  4427. (^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4428. (^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  4429. The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
  4430. in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
  4431. file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS GUI in the replication
  4432. profiles tab under Preferences.
  4433. If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
  4434. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
  4435. Using an authentication file:
  4436. It's possible to have a different file for each server you connect to,
  4437. with the credentials for that server and --^authfile=<authentication_file>
  4438. where the authentication_file must be formed by the following 2 lines:
  4439. 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
  4440. 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
  4441. == CMD_HELP_PUSH ==
  4442. Remarks:
  4443. The '^push' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
  4444. changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
  4445. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  4446. There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
  4447. A '^push' operation means that the replication operation will send data
  4448. from the source repository to the destination repository. In this case,
  4449. the client will connect to the source repository, getting the data to
  4450. replicate, and then it will send it to the destination repository. While
  4451. the former (source) must have connectivity to the destination, the latter
  4452. (destination) will not connect itself to the source.
  4453. In a typical distributed scenario, a developer pushes data from his local
  4454. server to the main server. Also, the developer might want to pull the latest
  4455. repository updates from the main server, too.
  4456. Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have
  4457. been made on the same branch on two replicated repositories.
  4458. - Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
  4459. than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
  4460. changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
  4461. - Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
  4462. correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
  4463. is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
  4464. scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
  4465. changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
  4466. being able to push again.
  4467. Push can work in two modes:
  4468. 1) Direct communication between servers: The origin server will send
  4469. the data to the destination server, automatically synchronizing data
  4470. for the specified branch.
  4471. 2) Export package mode: The client will only connect to the source and
  4472. generate a replication package obtaining both data and metadata for the
  4473. specified branch. The '--^package' modifier will be used.
  4474. Both modes require the user running the command to be authenticated
  4475. by the server, either using the default authentication in the client.conf
  4476. file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers.
  4477. The ^push replication works in a direct way. When executed, the command
  4478. will replicate the selected branch from source to destination, instead of
  4479. asking the destination repository to connect to the source and obtain the
  4480. selected branch (as the pull does).
  4481. Examples:
  4482. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  4483. (Replicates the 'main' branch from 'myserver' to 'remoteserver'. In this case,
  4484. both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
  4485. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
  4486. --^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4487. (Replicates same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
  4488. to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
  4489. from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
  4490. integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
  4491. password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
  4492. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
  4493. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
  4494. (Replicates the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
  4495. server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
  4496. Unity VCS.)
  4497. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CLONE ==
  4498. Clones a remote repository.
  4499. == CMD_USAGE_CLONE ==
  4500. Usage:
  4501. cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> [<dst_rep_spec> | <dst_repserver_spec>]
  4502. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] |
  4503. [--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>] |
  4504. [--^authfile=<authentication_file>]]
  4505. [--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>]
  4506. (Direct repository-to-repository clone.)
  4507. cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file>
  4508. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] |
  4509. [--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>] |
  4510. [--^authfile=<authentication_file>]]
  4511. [--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>]
  4512. (Clones to an intermediate package, that can be imported later using a
  4513. pull into the destination repository.)
  4514. Options:
  4515. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  4516. different in source and destination and there is not a
  4517. profile to authenticate to destination.
  4518. --^package Exports the specified repository to a package file,
  4519. instead of a repository.
  4520. Useful for moving data between servers when there is no
  4521. direct network connection.
  4522. The resulting package must be imported using the
  4523. pull command.
  4524. --^authmode Describes the authentication method used in the server.
  4525. Admisible values: ^NameWorkingMode, ^LDAPWorkingMode,
  4526. ^ADWorkingMode, ^UPWorkingMode.
  4527. --^authdata Authentication information sent to the server. It holds
  4528. the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry in the
  4529. client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The
  4530. profiles.conf file can be easily generated from the Unity
  4531. VCS in the connection profiles tab under Preferences.
  4532. --^authfile Allows to specify a path to a file with the credentials.
  4533. --^trmode The source and destination repositories may use different
  4534. authentication modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies
  4535. how to translate the user names from the source to the
  4536. destination. It must be one of the following values:
  4537. ^copy: (Default.) Means that the user identifiers will
  4538. be just copied; ^name: The user identifiers will be
  4539. matched by name; ^table: Uses a translation table
  4540. specified in the option '--^trtable'
  4541. --^trtable If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table
  4542. is a file containing lines in the form <oldname;newname>
  4543. (one per line). When the branch is written to the
  4544. destination repository, the objects created by a user
  4545. identified by "oldname" in the source repository will
  4546. be set to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  4547. src_rep_spec Source repository of the clone operation.
  4548. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4549. specs.)
  4550. dst_rep_spec Destination repository of the clone operation. If it
  4551. exists, it must be empty. If it does not exist, it will
  4552. be created.
  4553. If it is not specified, the command will use user's
  4554. default repository server.
  4555. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4556. specs.)
  4557. dst_repserver_spec Destination repository server of the clone operation.
  4558. If there is a repository with the same name as
  4559. <src_rep_spec> in the destination repository server, it
  4560. must be empty. If there is not, it will be created.
  4561. If it is not specified, the command will use user's
  4562. default repository server.
  4563. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4564. server specs.)
  4565. translation_table_file If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table
  4566. is a file containing lines in the form <oldname;newname>
  4567. (one per line). When the branch is written to the destination
  4568. repository, the objects created by a user identified by
  4569. "oldname" in the source repository will be set to the user
  4570. with "newname" on the destination.
  4571. authentication_file Authentication file where you may have a different file
  4572. for each server you connect to, containing the credentials
  4573. for that server. The file format must comply with the
  4574. following structure: 2 lines, where the first line
  4575. describes the authentication mode, equally described as in
  4576. --^auth_mode; and the second line containing the data as
  4577. sdescribed in --^auth_data.
  4578. == CMD_HELP_CLONE ==
  4579. Remarks:
  4580. The clone command can replicate branches (along with their changesets,
  4581. labels, attributes, reviews, and so on) from a source repository to a
  4582. destination repository. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  4583. The destination repository can be created beforehand, but if it contains
  4584. previous data, the clone operation will fail.
  4585. The clone operation does NOT clone repository submodules, nor repositories
  4586. under a Xlink.
  4587. Examples:
  4588. cm ^clone awesomeProject@tardis@cloud
  4589. (Clones 'awesomeProject' repository from 'tardis@cloud' organization into
  4590. a local repository with the same name.)
  4591. cm ^clone repo@server.home:9095 repo-local
  4592. (Clones 'repo' from 'server.home:9095' into 'repo-local' at user's default
  4593. repository server.)
  4594. cm ^clone project@192.168.111.130:8084 ^repserver:192.168.111.200:9095
  4595. (Clones 'project' repository from '192.168.111.130:8084' into
  4596. 'project@192.168.111.200:9095'.)
  4597. cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode \
  4598. --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4599. (Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using LDAP
  4600. authentication against the remote repository.)
  4601. cm ^clone project@upserver:8084 --authmode=^UPWorkingMode \
  4602. --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  4603. (Clones 'project' repository from 'upserver:8084' using UPWorkingMode
  4604. authentication against the remote repository.)
  4605. cm ^clone project@upserver:8084 --authmode=^UPWorkingMode \
  4606. --^user=<user> --^password=<pwd>
  4607. (Clones 'project' repository from 'upserver:8084' using UPWorkingMode
  4608. authentication against the remote repository but specifying the
  4609. ^user and ^password instead of the ^authdata.)
  4610. cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authfile=credentials.txt \
  4611. --^trmode=table --^trtable=table.txt
  4612. (Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using an authentication
  4613. file against the remote repository, and translating users following the
  4614. specified translation table.)
  4615. cm ^clone project@server.home:9095 --^package=project.plasticpkg
  4616. cm ^repository ^create project@mordor.home:8084
  4617. cm ^pull --^package=project.plasticpkg project@mordor.home:8084
  4618. (Clones 'project' repository from 'server.home:9095' into the package
  4619. 'project.plasticpkg', which is later imported through a pull into
  4620. the 'project' repository at 'mordor.home:8084'.)
  4621. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVERT ==
  4622. Reverts an item to a previous revision.
  4623. == CMD_USAGE_REVERT ==
  4624. Usage:
  4625. cm ^revert <revspec>
  4626. Options:
  4627. revspec Specification of the changeset that contains the
  4628. revision which content will be loaded in the workspace.
  4629. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about revision specs.)
  4630. == CMD_HELP_REVERT ==
  4631. Remarks:
  4632. The item must be checked in.
  4633. Examples:
  4634. cm ^revert dir#^cs:0
  4635. cm ^revert C:\mywks\dir\file1.txt#23456
  4636. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_HISTORY ==
  4637. Displays the history of a file or directory.
  4638. == CMD_USAGE_HISTORY ==
  4639. Usage:
  4640. cm ^history | ^hist <item_path>[ ...] [--^long | --^format=<str_format>]
  4641. [--^symlink] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  4642. [--^moveddeleted]
  4643. Options:
  4644. --^long Shows additional information.
  4645. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  4646. Remarks for more info. This option cannnot be combined
  4647. with '--^xml'.
  4648. --^symlink Applies the history operation to the symlink and not to
  4649. the target.
  4650. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  4651. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  4652. cannot be combined with '--^format'.
  4653. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  4654. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  4655. See the MSDN documentation at
  4656. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  4657. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  4658. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  4659. --^moveddeleted Include move and remove operations in the history.
  4660. --^limit Displays the N most recent revisions for the specified items,
  4661. sorted by date and changeset id. If a negative number is supplied,
  4662. it will return an empty list. If a number higher than the number
  4663. of revisions is supplied, it will return all the available revisions
  4664. regarding that item.
  4665. item_path Item's path. Use a whitespace to separate paths. Use
  4666. double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  4667. Paths can be server path revisions too.
  4668. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4669. == CMD_HELP_HISTORY ==
  4670. Remarks:
  4671. This command shows a list of revisions for a given item, and label, branch,
  4672. and comment info for each revision.
  4673. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  4674. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  4675. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  4676. {0} | {^date} Date.
  4677. {1} | {^changesetid} Changeset number.
  4678. {2} | {^branch} Branch.
  4679. {4} | {^comment} Comment.
  4680. {5} | {^owner} Owner.
  4681. {6} | {^id} Revision id.
  4682. {7} | {^repository} Repository.
  4683. {8} | {^server} Server.
  4684. {9} | {^repspec} Repository spec.
  4685. {10} | {^datastatus} Availability of the revision data.
  4686. {11} | {^path} Path or spec passed as <item_path>.
  4687. {12} | {^itemid} Item Id.
  4688. {13} | {^size} Size.
  4689. {14} | {^hash} Hash code.
  4690. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  4691. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  4692. Examples:
  4693. cm ^history file1.txt "file 2.txt"
  4694. cm ^hist c:\workspace --^long
  4695. (Displays all information.)
  4696. cm ^history link --^symlink
  4697. (Applies the history operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
  4698. cm ^history ^serverpath:/src/foo/bar.c#^br:/main/task001@myserver
  4699. (Retrieves the revision history from a server path in a given branch.)
  4700. cm ^history bar.c, foo.c --long --limit=2
  4701. (Retrieves the 2 last revisions for the bar.c and foo.c items.)
  4702. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_TREE ==
  4703. > **This command is deprecated.**
  4704. Shows the revision tree for an item.
  4705. == CMD_USAGE_REVISION_TREE ==
  4706. Usage:
  4707. cm ^tree <path> [--^symlink]
  4708. Options:
  4709. --^symlink Applies the operation to the link file and not to the target.
  4710. path Item path.
  4711. == CMD_HELP_REVISION_TREE ==
  4712. Examples:
  4713. cm ^tree fichero1.txt
  4714. cm ^tree c:\workspace
  4715. cm ^tree link --^symlink
  4716. (Applies the operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
  4717. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE ==
  4718. Allows the user to delete files and directories.
  4719. == CMD_USAGE_REMOVE ==
  4720. Usage:
  4721. cm ^remove | ^rm <command> [options]
  4722. Commands:
  4723. - ^controlled (optional)
  4724. - ^private
  4725. To get more information about each command run:
  4726. cm ^remove <command> --^usage
  4727. cm ^remove <command> --^help
  4728. == CMD_HELP_REMOVE ==
  4729. Examples:
  4730. cm ^remove \path\controlled_file.txt
  4731. cm ^remove ^private \path\private_file.txt
  4732. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
  4733. Deletes a file or directory from version control.
  4734. == CMD_USAGE_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
  4735. Usage:
  4736. cm ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>]
  4737. [--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^nodisk]
  4738. Options:
  4739. --^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
  4740. format. See the Examples for more information.
  4741. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  4742. format. See the Examples for more information.
  4743. --^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on
  4744. disk.
  4745. item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  4746. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  4747. paths.
  4748. == CMD_HELP_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
  4749. Remarks:
  4750. Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
  4751. directory in the source code control.
  4752. Requirements:
  4753. - The item must be under source code control.
  4754. Reading input from stdin:
  4755. The '^remove' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  4756. dash "-".
  4757. Example: cm ^remove -
  4758. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  4759. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to remove.
  4760. Example:
  4761. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^remove -
  4762. (In Windows, removes all .c files in the workspace.)
  4763. Examples:
  4764. cm ^remove src
  4765. (Removes 'src'. If src is a directory, this is the same as
  4766. 'cm ^remove -^R src'.)
  4767. cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{0} - REMOVED" \
  4768. --^errorformat="{0} - ERROR REMOVING"
  4769. (Removes 'file.txt' from version control and from disk, writing
  4770. "c:\workspace\file.txt - ^REMOVED" if the operation succeeded, or
  4771. "c:\workspace\file.txt - ^ERROR ^REMOVING" otherwise.)
  4772. cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^nodisk
  4773. (Removes 'file.txt' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
  4774. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
  4775. Deletes a private file or directory.
  4776. Warning: files deleted using the command are permanently erased, and are not
  4777. recoverable. It is recommended that you use the '--^dry-run' option to check
  4778. which files will be affected by the command.
  4779. == CMD_USAGE_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
  4780. Usage:
  4781. cm ^remove | ^rm ^private <path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^ignored]
  4782. [--^verbose] [--^dry-run]
  4783. Options:
  4784. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively deletes private files from within controlled
  4785. directories.
  4786. --^ignored Deletes also ignored and cloaked files and directories.
  4787. --^verbose Prints all affected paths.
  4788. --^dry-run Runs the command without making any changes on disk.
  4789. path Path of the files or directories to remove. Use double
  4790. quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
  4791. whitespace to separate paths.
  4792. == CMD_HELP_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
  4793. Remarks:
  4794. If the path is a private file or directory, it will be deleted from disk.
  4795. If the path is a controlled file, the command fails.
  4796. If the path is a controlled directory, the command fails unless you
  4797. specify the '-^r' option, in which case it will delete all private files and
  4798. directories below the specified directory.
  4799. Examples:
  4800. cm ^remove ^private private_directory
  4801. (Deletes 'private_directory'.)
  4802. cm ^remove ^private c:\workspace\controlled_directory
  4803. (Fails, because 'controlled_directory' is not private.)
  4804. cm ^remove ^private -^r c:\workspace\controlled_directory
  4805. (Deletes all private files and directories below 'controlled_directory'.)
  4806. cm ^rm ^private --^dry-run --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
  4807. (Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
  4808. 'controlled_directory' without actually deleting anything.)
  4809. cm ^rm ^private --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
  4810. (Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
  4811. 'controlled_directory', performing the delete.)
  4812. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4813. Deletes a trigger.
  4814. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4815. Usage:
  4816. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^delete | ^rm <subtype-type> <position_number>
  4817. [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  4818. Options:
  4819. --^server Deletes the trigger on the specified server.
  4820. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  4821. one configured on the client.
  4822. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  4823. (Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  4824. types.)
  4825. position_number Position assigned to the trigger when it was created.
  4826. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4827. Examples:
  4828. cm ^trigger ^delete ^after-setselector 4
  4829. cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
  4830. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4831. Sets an attribute on a given object.
  4832. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4833. Usage:
  4834. cm ^attribute | ^att ^set <att_spec> <object_spec> <att_value>
  4835. att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  4836. learn more about attribute specs.)
  4837. object_spec Specification of the object to set the attribute on.
  4838. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
  4839. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  4840. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4841. att_value The attribute value to set to the object.
  4842. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4843. Remarks:
  4844. An attribute can be set on an object to save additional information for
  4845. this object.
  4846. Attributes can be set on the following objects: branches, changesets,
  4847. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  4848. Examples:
  4849. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
  4850. (Sets attribute 'status' to branch 'SCM105' with value 'open'.)
  4851. cm ^att ^set ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084 ^lb:LB008@reptest@server2:8084 yes
  4852. (Sets attribute 'integrated' to label 'LB008' in repository 'reptest' with
  4853. value 'yes'.)
  4854. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETOWNER ==
  4855. Sets the owner of an object.
  4856. == CMD_USAGE_SETOWNER ==
  4857. Usage:
  4858. cm ^setowner | ^sto --^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group> <object_spec>
  4859. Options:
  4860. --^user User name. New owner of the object.
  4861. --^group Group name. New owner of the object.
  4862. object_spec Specification of the object to set the new owner on.
  4863. The owner can be set on the following objects:
  4864. repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
  4865. label, item, revision and attribute.
  4866. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4867. == CMD_HELP_SETOWNER ==
  4868. Remarks:
  4869. The owner of an object can be a user or a group.
  4870. The owner can be set on the following objects: repository server,
  4871. repository, branch, changeset, label, item, revision, and attribute.
  4872. Examples:
  4873. cm ^setowner --^user=john ^repserver:localhost:8084
  4874. (Sets 'john' as repository server owner.)
  4875. cm ^sto --^group=development ^rep:mainRep@PlasticServer:8084
  4876. (Sets 'development' group as owner of 'mainRep' repository.)
  4877. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETSELECTOR ==
  4878. > **This command is deprecated.**
  4879. Sets the selector to a workspace.
  4880. == CMD_USAGE_SETSELECTOR ==
  4881. Selectors are discontinued and its use is not recommended.
  4882. Usage:
  4883. cm ^setselector | ^sts [--^file=<selector_file>] [--^ignorechanges]
  4884. [--^forcedetailedprogress] [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
  4885. [--^noinput]
  4886. Options:
  4887. --^file File to load a selector from.
  4888. --^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
  4889. shown if there are pending changes detected when
  4890. updating the workspace.
  4891. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
  4892. is redirected.
  4893. --^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
  4894. operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
  4895. wk_path Path of the workspace to set the selector.
  4896. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  4897. to learn more about workspace specs.)
  4898. == CMD_HELP_SETSELECTOR ==
  4899. Remarks:
  4900. This command sets the selector of a workspace.
  4901. A workspace needs information to load revisions from the repository.
  4902. To get this information, Unity VCS uses a selector.
  4903. Using a selector, it is possible to load revisions from a given branch,
  4904. label, or changeset.
  4905. If a file to load the selector is not specified, the default Operating
  4906. System editor will be executed.
  4907. Sample selector:
  4908. - ^repository "^default" // working repository
  4909. - ^path "/" // rules will be applied to the root directory
  4910. - ^branch "/^main" // obtain latest revisions from ^br:/^main
  4911. - ^checkout "/^main" // place checkouts on branch ^br:/^main
  4912. Examples:
  4913. cm ^sts
  4914. (Opens the current selector file to be applied.)
  4915. cm ^sts ^wk:workspace_projA@reptest
  4916. (Opens the specified selector file to be applied.)
  4917. cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml
  4918. (Sets the specified selector file in the current workspace.)
  4919. cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml ^wk:MyWorkspace
  4920. (Sets the specified selector file in the selected workspace.)
  4921. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVE ==
  4922. > **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^shelveset instead.
  4923. Shelves the contents of checked-out items.
  4924. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVE ==
  4925. Usage:
  4926. cm ^shelve [<item_path>+] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
  4927. [-^c=str_comment | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  4928. [--^encoding=name] [--^comparisonmethod=comp_method]
  4929. [--^summaryformat]
  4930. (Shelves the contents.)
  4931. cm ^shelve --^apply=<sh_spec> [--^mount]
  4932. (Applies a stored shelveset.)
  4933. cm ^shelve --^delete=<sh_spec>
  4934. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  4935. Options:
  4936. item_path Items to be shelved, separated by spaces. Quotes (") can
  4937. be used to specify paths containing spaces.
  4938. --^all The items changed, moved and deleted locally, on the
  4939. given paths, will also be included.
  4940. --^dependencies Includes local change dependencies in the items to
  4941. shelve.
  4942. -^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelveset.
  4943. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
  4944. shelveset.
  4945. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  4946. See the MSDN documentation at
  4947. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  4948. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  4949. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  4950. --^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See remarks for more info.
  4951. --^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
  4952. skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
  4953. messages. For automation purposes.
  4954. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  4955. --^delete Removes the specified shelveset.
  4956. Shelveset specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  4957. --^apply Restores the shelved contents of the specified shelveset.
  4958. Shelve specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  4959. == CMD_HELP_SHELVE ==
  4960. Remarks:
  4961. If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelve will involve
  4962. all the pending changes in the workspace.
  4963. The shelve operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
  4964. Requirements to shelve an item:
  4965. - The item must be under source code control.
  4966. - The item must be checked out or changed (--^all option must be used).
  4967. Comparison methods:
  4968. ^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
  4969. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  4970. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  4971. ^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  4972. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  4973. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  4974. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  4975. you to specify the comment.
  4976. Examples:
  4977. cm ^shelve -^c="my comment"
  4978. (Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
  4979. comment.)
  4980. cm ^shelve file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
  4981. (Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
  4982. commentshelve.txt file.)
  4983. cm ^shelve --^apply=^sh:3
  4984. (Applies a stored shelveset.)
  4985. cm ^shelve --^delete=^sh:3
  4986. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  4987. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelve -
  4988. (Shelves client changelist.
  4989. The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
  4990. 'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
  4991. shelve command.)
  4992. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET ==
  4993. Allows the user to manage shelvesets.
  4994. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET ==
  4995. Usage:
  4996. cm ^shelveset <command> [options]
  4997. Commands:
  4998. - ^create | ^mk
  4999. - ^delete | ^rm
  5000. - ^apply
  5001. To get more information about each command run:
  5002. cm ^shelveset <command> --^usage
  5003. cm ^shelveset <command> --^help
  5004. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET ==
  5005. Examples:
  5006. cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
  5007. cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
  5008. cm ^shelve ^apply ^sh:3
  5009. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  5010. Shelves pending changes.
  5011. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  5012. Usage:
  5013. cm ^shelveset ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
  5014. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  5015. [--^summaryformat]
  5016. Options:
  5017. item_path Items to shelve. Use a whitespace to separate user names.
  5018. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  5019. spaces.
  5020. --^all The items changed, moved, and deleted locally, on the
  5021. given paths, will also be included.
  5022. --^dependencies Includes local change dependencies into the items to
  5023. shelve.
  5024. --^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
  5025. skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
  5026. messages. For automation purposes.
  5027. -^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelve.
  5028. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
  5029. shelve.
  5030. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  5031. The '^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items inside the
  5032. repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
  5033. checkin the files.
  5034. Remarks:
  5035. If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
  5036. include all the pending changes in the workspace.
  5037. The '^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from the
  5038. given path.
  5039. Requirements to shelve an item:
  5040. - The item must be under source code control.
  5041. - The item must be checked out or changed ('--^all' option must be used).
  5042. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  5043. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  5044. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  5045. you to specify the comment.
  5046. Examples:
  5047. cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
  5048. (Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
  5049. comment.)
  5050. cm ^shelveset file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
  5051. (Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
  5052. 'commentshelve.txt' file. Note, '^create' is the default subcommand.)
  5053. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelveset -
  5054. (Shelves client changelist.
  5055. The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
  5056. 'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
  5057. '^shelveset' command.)
  5058. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  5059. Deletes a shelveset.
  5060. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  5061. Usage:
  5062. cm ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
  5063. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5064. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  5065. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  5066. The '^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
  5067. Examples:
  5068. cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
  5069. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  5070. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  5071. Applies a stored shelveset.
  5072. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  5073. Usage:
  5074. cm ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [<change_path>[ ...]] [--^preview]
  5075. [--^mount] [--^encoding=<name>]
  5076. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
  5077. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
  5078. Options:
  5079. --^preview Prints the changes to apply on the workspace without
  5080. applying them
  5081. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  5082. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  5083. See the MSDN documentation at
  5084. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5085. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5086. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5087. --^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
  5088. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5089. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  5090. change_path The change path(s) of the shelve to apply. It's a
  5091. server path, the one printed by the --preview option.
  5092. When no path is set, all changes will be applied.
  5093. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  5094. The '^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
  5095. Remarks:
  5096. Comparison methods:
  5097. ^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
  5098. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  5099. ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  5100. ^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  5101. Examples:
  5102. cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
  5103. (Applies a stored shelve.)
  5104. cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3 /src/foo.c
  5105. (Applies only the /src/foo.c change stored on the shelve.)
  5106. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  5107. Lists objects and attributes.
  5108. == CMD_USAGE_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  5109. Usage:
  5110. cm ^showfindobjects <object>
  5111. Options:
  5112. ^object Check remarks for available objects and attributes.
  5113. == CMD_HELP_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  5114. Remarks:
  5115. Available objects and attributes:
  5116. - ^attribute.
  5117. - ^attributetype.
  5118. - ^branch.
  5119. - ^changeset.
  5120. - ^label.
  5121. - ^merge.
  5122. - ^replicationlog.
  5123. - ^review.
  5124. - ^revision.
  5125. - ^shelve.
  5126. ^attribute:
  5127. You can find attributes by filtering using the following fields:
  5128. ^type string.
  5129. ^value string.
  5130. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5131. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5132. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5133. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5134. ^comment string.
  5135. ^srcobj object spec: item path, branch, changeset, revision, or label.
  5136. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
  5137. ^ID integer.
  5138. Examples:
  5139. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^type = 'status'"
  5140. (Finds all attributes of type 'status'.)
  5141. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^this ^week'"
  5142. (Finds all attributes applied during the current week.)
  5143. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^value = 'resolved' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
  5144. (Finds all attributes with value 'resolved' applied by me.)
  5145. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^item:readme.txt'"
  5146. (Finds the attributes applied to the item 'readme.txt'.)
  5147. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^br:/main/scm23343'"
  5148. (Finds the attributes applied to the branch scm23343.)
  5149. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:readme.txt#^br:/main/task002'"
  5150. (Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision.)
  5151. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:^revid:1126'"
  5152. (Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision id.)
  5153. ^attributetype:
  5154. You can find attribute types by filtering using the following fields:
  5155. ^name string.
  5156. ^value string.
  5157. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5158. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5159. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5160. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5161. ^comment string.
  5162. ^source object spec: item path, branch, changeset or label.
  5163. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
  5164. ^ID integer.
  5165. Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
  5166. Replication related fields:
  5167. - ^ReplLogId
  5168. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5169. - ^ReplSrcId
  5170. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5171. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5172. Examples:
  5173. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^name ^like 'st%'"
  5174. (Finds all attribute where name starts with 'st'.)
  5175. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^today'"
  5176. (Finds all attributes applied today.)
  5177. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^comment != ''" --^xml
  5178. (Finds all attribute types that have a comment and prints the
  5179. output in XML format to the standard output.)
  5180. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^item:readme.txt'"
  5181. (Finds all attribute types in item 'readme.txt'.)
  5182. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^cs:30'"
  5183. (Finds all attribute types in changeset '30'.)
  5184. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^lb:v0.14.1'"
  5185. (Finds all attribute types in label 'v0.14.1'.)
  5186. ^branch:
  5187. You can find branches by filtering using the following fields:
  5188. ^name string.
  5189. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5190. ^changesets date (of the changesets in the branch). Check "date constants"
  5191. for more info in this guide.
  5192. ^attribute string.
  5193. ^attrvalue string.
  5194. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5195. ^parent branch spec.
  5196. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  5197. ^comment string.
  5198. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5199. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5200. ^ID integer.
  5201. ^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
  5202. Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
  5203. Sorting fields:
  5204. - ^date
  5205. - ^branchname
  5206. Replication related fields:
  5207. - ^ReplLogId
  5208. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5209. - ^ReplSrcId
  5210. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5211. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5212. Examples:
  5213. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^name ^like 'scm23%'"
  5214. (Finds branches which name starts with 'scm23'.)
  5215. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
  5216. (Finds branches created during the last week.)
  5217. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^changesets >= '^today'"
  5218. (Finds branches with changesets created today.)
  5219. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue = 'failed'"
  5220. (Finds branches that have the attribute 'status' and which
  5221. value is 'failed'.)
  5222. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^parent != '^br:/main'"
  5223. (Finds branches created by other than me and which parent
  5224. branch is not '/main'.)
  5225. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^id = 2029607"
  5226. (Finds the branch which id is 2029607.)
  5227. ^changeset:
  5228. You can find changesets by filtering using the following fields:
  5229. ^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
  5230. specify this object.
  5231. ^changesetid integer.
  5232. ^attribute string.
  5233. ^attrvalue string.
  5234. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5235. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5236. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5237. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5238. ^comment string.
  5239. ^onlywithrevisions boolean. To filter whether a cset has revisions or not.
  5240. ^returnparent boolean. A way to return the parent of a cset. Good for scripting.
  5241. ^parent changeset id (integer).
  5242. ^ID integer.
  5243. ^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
  5244. Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
  5245. Sorting fields:
  5246. - ^date
  5247. - ^changesetid
  5248. Replication related fields:
  5249. - ^ReplLogId
  5250. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5251. - ^ReplSrcId
  5252. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5253. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5254. Examples:
  5255. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^branch = '/main/scm23119'"
  5256. (Finds all changesets in branch 'scm23119'.)
  5257. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^attribute = 'status'"
  5258. (Finds the changesets with the attribute 'status'.)
  5259. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^date >= '6/8/2018' ^and ^owner != '^me'"
  5260. (Finds all changesets with creation date equal or
  5261. greater than 6/8/2018 and created by others than me.)
  5262. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^guid = '1b30674f-14cc-4fd7-962b-676c8a6f5cb6'"
  5263. (Finds the changeset with the specified guid.)
  5264. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^comment = ''"
  5265. (Finds the changesets with no comments.)
  5266. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^onlywithrevisions = 'false'"
  5267. (Finds changesets with no revisions.)
  5268. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^changesetid = 29 ^and ^returnparent = 'true'"
  5269. (Finds the parent of changeset 29.)
  5270. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^parent = 548"
  5271. (Finds all changesets which parent is cset 548.)
  5272. ^label:
  5273. You can find labels by filtering using the following fields:
  5274. ^name string.
  5275. ^attribute string.
  5276. ^attrvalue string.
  5277. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5278. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5279. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5280. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5281. ^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
  5282. specify this object.
  5283. ^branchid integer.
  5284. ^changeset changeset id (integer).
  5285. ^comment string.
  5286. ^ID integer.
  5287. ^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
  5288. Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
  5289. Sorting fields:
  5290. - ^date
  5291. - ^labelname
  5292. Replication related fields:
  5293. - ^ReplLogId
  5294. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5295. - ^ReplSrcId
  5296. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5297. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5298. Examples:
  5299. cm ^find ^label "^where ^name ^like '7.0.16.%'"
  5300. (Finds the labels with a name that starts with '7.0.16.'.)
  5301. cm ^find ^label "^where ^date >= '^this ^month' ^and \
  5302. ^attribute = 'publish-status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'PUBLISHED'"
  5303. (Finds the labels created this month with an attribute 'publish-status'
  5304. set to a value other than 'PUBLISHED'.)
  5305. cm ^find ^label "^where ^branch = '/main'"
  5306. (Finds all labels applied to the main branch.)
  5307. cm ^find ^label "^where ^changeset = 111733"
  5308. (Finds the labels applied to changeset 111733.)
  5309. ^merge:
  5310. You can find merges by filtering using the following fields:
  5311. ^srcbranch branch spec.
  5312. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  5313. ^srcchangeset changeset id (integer).
  5314. ^dstbranch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
  5315. specify this object.
  5316. ^dstchangeset changeset id (integer).
  5317. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5318. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5319. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5320. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5321. ^type string. Check possible values in "Type values" below.
  5322. ^ID integer.
  5323. ^Type values:
  5324. - ^merge
  5325. - ^cherrypick
  5326. - ^cherrypicksubstractive
  5327. - ^interval
  5328. - ^intervalcherrypick
  5329. - ^intervalcherrypicksubstractive
  5330. Examples:
  5331. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^srcbranch = '^br:/main'"
  5332. (Finds merges from the main branch.)
  5333. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^dstchangeset = 108261" \
  5334. --^format="{^srcbranch} {^srcchangeset} {^dstbranch} {^dstchangeset} {^owner}"
  5335. (Finds the merges to changeset 108261 and prints the
  5336. formatted output showing the source (branch and cset id),
  5337. the destination (branch and cset id), and the merge owner.)
  5338. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^type = '^cherrypick' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
  5339. (Finds all my cherry picks.)
  5340. ^replicationlog:
  5341. You can find replication log by filtering using the following fields:
  5342. ^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
  5343. specify this object.
  5344. ^repositoryname string.
  5345. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5346. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5347. ^server string.
  5348. ^package boolean.
  5349. ^ID integer.
  5350. Examples:
  5351. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^branch = '/main/gm22358'"
  5352. (Finds the replication logs of branch 'gm22358'.)
  5353. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^package = 'T' ^and ^server ^like '%cloud%'"
  5354. (Finds the replication logs created from package which
  5355. server name contains 'cloud'.)
  5356. ^review:
  5357. You can find code reviews by filtering using the following fields:
  5358. ^status string.
  5359. ^assignee string.
  5360. ^title string.
  5361. ^target object spec: branch or changeset.
  5362. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  5363. ^targetid integer.
  5364. ^targettype string. Check "target types" for more info.
  5365. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5366. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5367. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5368. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5369. ^ID integer.
  5370. ^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
  5371. Target types:
  5372. - ^branch
  5373. - ^changeset
  5374. Sorting fields:
  5375. - ^date
  5376. - ^modifieddate
  5377. - ^status
  5378. Examples:
  5379. cm ^find ^review "^where ^status = 'pending' ^and ^assignee = '^me'"
  5380. (Finds all my pending reviews.)
  5381. cm ^find ^review "^where ^target = '^br:/main/scm17932'"
  5382. (Finds the reviews related to branch 'scm17932'.)
  5383. cm ^find ^review "^where ^targettype = '^changeset'"
  5384. (Finds the reviews which target type is changeset.)
  5385. ^revision:
  5386. You can find revisions by filtering using the following fields:
  5387. ^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
  5388. specify this object.
  5389. ^changeset changeset id (integer).
  5390. ^item string or integer.
  5391. ^itemid integer.
  5392. ^attribute string.
  5393. ^attrvalue string.
  5394. ^archived boolean.
  5395. ^comment string.
  5396. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5397. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5398. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5399. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5400. ^parent revision id (integer).
  5401. ^returnparent boolean.
  5402. ^shelve shelve id (integer).
  5403. ^size integer (in bytes).
  5404. ^type string. Check "type values" for more info.
  5405. ^workspacecheckoutid integer.
  5406. ^ID integer.
  5407. Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
  5408. ^type values:
  5409. - ^dir
  5410. - ^bin
  5411. - ^txt
  5412. Replication related fields:
  5413. - ^ReplLogId
  5414. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5415. - ^ReplSrcId
  5416. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5417. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5418. Examples:
  5419. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset >= 111756"
  5420. (Finds the revisions created in changeset 111756
  5421. and later.)
  5422. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^itemid = 2250"
  5423. (Finds the revisions of item 'readme.txt' plus
  5424. item id 2250.)
  5425. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^item = 2250"
  5426. (Gets the same revisions as the previous example.)
  5427. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'open'"
  5428. (Finds the revisions with attribute 'status' which
  5429. value is other than 'open'.)
  5430. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^archived = 'true'"
  5431. (Finds the revisions that are archived in an
  5432. external storage.)
  5433. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^type = '^txt' and \
  5434. ^size > 300000 ^and ^owner = '^me' and ^date >= '2 ^months ^ago'"
  5435. (Finds the text revisions created by me two months
  5436. ago and with size greater than about 3MB.)
  5437. ^shelve:
  5438. You can find shelves by filtering using the following fields:
  5439. ^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
  5440. ^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  5441. ^attribute string.
  5442. ^attrvalue string.
  5443. ^comment string.
  5444. ^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
  5445. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  5446. ^parent integer.
  5447. ^shelveid integer.
  5448. ^ID integer.
  5449. Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
  5450. Replication related fields:
  5451. - ^ReplLogId
  5452. - ^ReplSrcDate
  5453. - ^ReplSrcId
  5454. - ^ReplSrcRepository
  5455. - ^ReplSrcServer
  5456. Examples:
  5457. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^date >= '^1 ^years ^ago'"
  5458. (Finds the shelves created by others than me during the last
  5459. year.)
  5460. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^shelveid = 2"
  5461. (Finds the shelve with name 2.)
  5462. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^id >= 3848"
  5463. (Finds the shelves which object id is greater than 3848.)
  5464. Replication related fields:
  5465. Many objects track replication data, meaning Unity VCS tracks where they were
  5466. originally created.
  5467. The fields you can use are:
  5468. ^ReplSrcServer repspec. Stands for "replication source server".
  5469. Server where the object was replicated from.
  5470. ^ReplSrcRepository string. Stands for "replication source repo". It is
  5471. the repository where the object was replicated from.
  5472. ^ReplLogId integer. ID of the replication operation. In Unity VCS,
  5473. each time new objects are created from a replica,
  5474. a new 'replicationlog' is created.
  5475. ^ReplSrcDate date. It is the date when the replica actually took
  5476. place.
  5477. Replicated objects will retain its original creation
  5478. date, o this field is useful if you want to find
  5479. objects that where replicated within a specific
  5480. timeframe.
  5481. ^ReplSrcId integer. It is the ID of the replication source server.
  5482. You can discover this ID searching for
  5483. '^replicationsource' objects with the 'cm ^find' command.
  5484. Examples:
  5485. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver='skull.codicefactory.com:9095'"
  5486. (Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'.)
  5487. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver = 'skull.codicefactory.com:9095' \
  5488. ^and ^replsrcrepository = 'codice'"
  5489. (Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'
  5490. and from repository 'codice'.)
  5491. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^repllogid = 2019974"
  5492. (Finds the revisions replicated from replica 2019974.)
  5493. cm ^find ^label "^where ^replsrcdate >= '^one ^month ^ago' \
  5494. ^and ^date >= '15 ^days ^ago'"
  5495. (Finds the labels created 15 days ago and were
  5496. replicated one month ago.)
  5497. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
  5498. (returns the following line:)
  5499. - 8780433 27/09/2018 8:49:38 codice@BACKYARD:8087 F mbarriosc
  5500. (Finds the replication logs created one week ago. Now, you can
  5501. check that the replicated branch was created before it was
  5502. replicated over:)
  5503. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^repllogid = 8780433"
  5504. (returns the following line:)
  5505. - 8780443 26/09/2018 12:20:55 /main/scm23078 maria codice T
  5506. cm ^find ^replicationsource
  5507. (returns the following two lines:)
  5508. - 7860739 codice@AFRODITA:8087 d9c4372a-dc55-4fdc-ad3d-baeb2e975f27
  5509. - 8175854 codice@BACKYARD:8087 66700d3a-036b-4b9a-a26f-adfc336b14f9
  5510. (Now, you can find the changesets replicated from codice@AFRODITA:8087:)
  5511. cm ^find ^changesets "^where ^replsrcid = 7860739"
  5512. Date constants:
  5513. You can use date formats that follow your machine localization settings.
  5514. For example, if your computer displays dates in the format 'MM-dd-yyyy',
  5515. you can use dates such as '12-31-2019' in your queries.
  5516. You can also use the following constants to simplify your queries:
  5517. '^today' today's date.
  5518. '^yesterday' yesterday's date.
  5519. '^this ^week' current week's Monday date.
  5520. '^this ^month' current month's 1st day date.
  5521. '^this ^year' current year's January 1st date.
  5522. '^one ^day ^ago' one day before the current date.
  5523. '^one ^week ^ago' seven days before the current date.
  5524. '^one ^month ^ago' one month before the current date.
  5525. 'n ^days ^ago' 'n' days before the current date.
  5526. 'n ^months ^ago' 'n' months before the current date.
  5527. 'n ^years ^ago' 'n' years before the current date.
  5528. The following '^where' clauses are valid for fields of type '^date':
  5529. - '(...) ^where ^date > '^today' (...)'
  5530. - '(...) ^where ^date < '^yesterday' (...)'
  5531. - '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^week' (...)'
  5532. - '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^month' (...)'
  5533. - '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^day ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^days ^ago' (...)'
  5534. - '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^week ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^weeks ^ago' (...)'
  5535. - '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^month ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^months ^ago' (...)'
  5536. - '(...) ^where ^date > '1 ^year ^ago' (...)'
  5537. You can also force a specific date format on the 'cm ^find' command using the
  5538. --^dateformat flag. Check 'cm ^find --^help' for further details.
  5539. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
  5540. Displays available trigger types.
  5541. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
  5542. Usage:
  5543. cm ^trigger ^showtypes
  5544. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
  5545. Displays the list of available trigger types.
  5546. Examples:
  5547. cm ^trigger ^showtypes
  5548. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWACL ==
  5549. Shows the ACL of an object.
  5550. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWACL ==
  5551. Usage:
  5552. cm ^showacl | ^sa <object_spec> [--^extended] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
  5553. [--^encoding=<name>]
  5554. Options:
  5555. --^extended Shows ACL hierarchy tree.
  5556. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  5557. It is possible to specify an output file.
  5558. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  5559. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  5560. See the MSDN documentation at
  5561. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5562. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5563. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5564. object_spec Specification of the object to show the ACL of.
  5565. The valid objects for this command are:
  5566. repserver, repository, branch, changeset, label, item,
  5567. and attribute.
  5568. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5569. == CMD_HELP_SHOWACL ==
  5570. Examples:
  5571. cm ^showacl ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
  5572. (Shows the ACL of the selected server.)
  5573. cm ^sa ^br:/main --^extended
  5574. (Shows the ACL hierarchy tree of the selected branch specification.)
  5575. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5576. Shows all the available commands.
  5577. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5578. Usage:
  5579. cm ^showcommands
  5580. == CMD_HELP_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5581. Bear in mind that there might be deprecated commands not displayed here
  5582. but which functionallity remains due to retrocompatibility reasons.
  5583. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWOWNER ==
  5584. Shows the owner of an object.
  5585. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWOWNER ==
  5586. Usage:
  5587. cm ^showowner | ^so <object_spec>
  5588. Options:
  5589. object_spec Specification of the object to show the owner of.
  5590. The object must be one of the following:
  5591. repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
  5592. label, attribute, revision, and item.
  5593. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5594. == CMD_HELP_SHOWOWNER ==
  5595. Remarks:
  5596. This command displays the owner of an object. The owner can be a user or
  5597. a group. The owner can be modified with 'cm ^setowner' command.
  5598. Examples:
  5599. cm ^showowner ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
  5600. (Shows the owner of the selected server.)
  5601. cm ^so ^item:samples\
  5602. (Shows the owner of the selected item specification.)
  5603. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5604. Lists the available permissions.
  5605. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5606. Usage:
  5607. cm ^showpermissions | ^sp
  5608. == CMD_HELP_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5609. Examples:
  5610. cm ^showpermissions
  5611. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5612. > **This command is deprecated.**
  5613. Shows the workspace selector.
  5614. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5615. Selectors are discontinued and its use is not recommended.
  5616. Usage:
  5617. cm ^showselector | ^ss [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
  5618. Options:
  5619. wk_path Path of the workspace to show the selector.
  5620. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5621. learn more about workspace specs.)
  5622. == CMD_HELP_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5623. Remarks:
  5624. If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
  5625. current directory as the workspace path.
  5626. Examples:
  5627. cm ^showselector c:\workspace
  5628. (Shows the selector for the selected workspace path.)
  5629. cm ^ss
  5630. (Shows the selector for current workspace.)
  5631. cm ^showselector > mySelector.txt
  5632. (Writes into a file the selector for the current workspace.)
  5633. cm ^showselector ^wk:mywk@reptest
  5634. (Shows the selector for the workspace 'mywk' in the repository 'reptest'.)
  5635. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT ==
  5636. Allows the user to perform support related operations.
  5637. == CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT ==
  5638. Usage:
  5639. cm ^support <command> [options]
  5640. Commands:
  5641. - ^bundle
  5642. To get more information about each command run:
  5643. cm ^support <command> --^usage
  5644. cm ^support <command> --^help
  5645. == CMD_HELP_SUPPORT ==
  5646. Examples:
  5647. cm ^support
  5648. cm ^support ^bundle
  5649. cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
  5650. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5651. Creates a "support bundle" package with relevant logs.
  5652. You can attach the file while requesting help, asking for extra info, or
  5653. submitting a bug.
  5654. == CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5655. Usage:
  5656. cm ^support ^bundle [<outputfile>]
  5657. Options:
  5658. outputfile Creates the "support bundle" package at the specified
  5659. location.
  5660. == CMD_HELP_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5661. Remarks:
  5662. This command allows users to create a "support bundle" package which can be
  5663. attached when requesting help, asking for extra info, or submitting a bug.
  5664. The user can optionally specify a location for the output file; otherwise, the
  5665. output file will be written to the temp directory.
  5666. Examples:
  5667. cm ^support ^bundle
  5668. (Creates "support bundle" in temp directory.)
  5669. cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
  5670. (Creates "support bundle" at the specified location.)
  5671. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH ==
  5672. Switches the workspace to a branch, changeset, label, or shelveset.
  5673. == CMD_USAGE_SWITCH ==
  5674. Usage:
  5675. cm ^switch (<brspec> | <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>)
  5676. [--^workspace=<path>] [--^repository=<name>]
  5677. [--^forcedetailedprogress]
  5678. [--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  5679. [--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
  5680. Options:
  5681. --^workspace Path where the workspace is located.
  5682. --^repository Switches to the specified repository.
  5683. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard
  5684. output is redirected.
  5685. --^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
  5686. operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
  5687. --^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
  5688. --^verbose Shows additional information.
  5689. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  5690. It is possible to specify an output file.
  5691. --^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
  5692. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  5693. See the MSDN documentation at
  5694. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5695. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5696. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5697. brspec Target branch.
  5698. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  5699. csetspec Target changeset.
  5700. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset specs.)
  5701. lbspec Target label.
  5702. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
  5703. shspec Target shelveset.
  5704. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about shelveset specs.)
  5705. == CMD_HELP_SWITCH ==
  5706. Remarks:
  5707. This command allows users to update the workspace tree to the contents
  5708. of the specified object (branch, label, shelveset, or changeset).
  5709. Examples:
  5710. cm ^switch ^br:/main
  5711. cm ^switch ^lb:Rel1.1
  5712. cm ^switch ^br:/main/scm002 --^repository=rep2
  5713. cm ^switch ^cs:4375
  5714. cm ^switch ^sh:2
  5715. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5716. > **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^switch instead.
  5717. Sets a branch as the working branch.
  5718. == CMD_USAGE_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5719. Usage:
  5720. cm ^switchtobranch [options] [branch_spec]
  5721. Options:
  5722. --^label=name | --^changeset=number load revisions from the specified
  5723. label or changeset. One of these options
  5724. is required if no branch_spec is given.
  5725. --^changeset=cset Switch to the specified changeset.
  5726. --^repository=rep Switch to the specified repository.
  5727. --^workspace | -wk=path path where the workspace is located.
  5728. branch_spec Branch specification.
  5729. == CMD_HELP_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5730. Remarks:
  5731. This command allows users to work in a branch.
  5732. If no branch_spec specified, a label or a changeset must be specified.
  5733. If no repository is specified, the branch is set to the current repository.
  5734. Examples:
  5735. cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main
  5736. cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main/task001
  5737. cm ^switchtobranch --^label=BL050
  5738. (Read-only configuration. The command loads the contents of the labeled
  5739. changeset.)
  5740. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SYNC ==
  5741. Synchronize with Git.
  5742. == CMD_USAGE_SYNC ==
  5743. Usage:
  5744. cm ^synchronize | ^sync <repspec> ^git [<url> [--^user=<usr_name> --^pwd=<pwd>]]
  5745. [(--^txtsimilaritypercent | --^binsimilaritypercent | \
  5746. --^dirsimilaritypercent)=<value>]
  5747. [--^author] [--^skipgitlfs] [--^gitpushchunk=<value>]
  5748. Options:
  5749. --^user User name for the specified URL.
  5750. --^pwd Password for the specified URL.
  5751. --^txtsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two text files
  5752. are the same (moved item)
  5753. --^binsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two binary files
  5754. are the same (moved item)
  5755. --^dirsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two directories
  5756. are the same (moved item)
  5757. --^author Uses name and timestamp values from the git author.
  5758. (git committer by default)
  5759. --^skipgitlfs Ignores the Git LFS configuration in the
  5760. .gitattributes file. It acts like without Git LFS
  5761. support.
  5762. --^gitpushchunk Process the push operation (exporting changes from
  5763. Unity VCS to Git) in chunks of a certain number of
  5764. changesets. This is only useful for huge repos to
  5765. avoid network or package size related issues or
  5766. just for debugging purposes. It uses chunks of
  5767. 1000 changesets if no value is specified.
  5768. url Remote repository URL (http(s):// or git:// or a
  5769. SSH URL).
  5770. repspec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' t
  5771. learn more about repository specs.)
  5772. git (Default).
  5773. == CMD_HELP_SYNC ==
  5774. Remarks:
  5775. - If the git repository requires user and password, then use '^url', '--^user',
  5776. and '--^pwd' options.
  5777. - If the git repository doesn't require user and password, then use '^url'
  5778. option with the first sync operation. With next sync operations, '^url'
  5779. option is optional.
  5780. - To use the SSH protocol to perform the sync, you must have the 'ssh' client
  5781. added to the PATH environment variable and properly configured to connect
  5782. to the remote host (i.e. private/public keys configured).
  5783. - Similarity works the same way as the Unity VCS GUI does.
  5784. Examples:
  5785. cm ^sync default@localhost:8087 ^git git://localhost/repository
  5786. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER ==
  5787. Allows the user to manage triggers.
  5788. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER ==
  5789. Usage:
  5790. cm ^trigger | ^tr <command> [options]
  5791. Commands:
  5792. - ^create | ^mk
  5793. - ^delete | ^rm
  5794. - ^edit
  5795. - ^list | ^ls
  5796. - ^showtypes
  5797. To get more information about each command run:
  5798. cm ^trigger <command> --^usage
  5799. cm ^trigger <command> --^help
  5800. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER ==
  5801. Examples:
  5802. cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
  5803. cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
  5804. cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
  5805. cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
  5806. cm ^tr ^showtypes
  5807. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TUBE ==
  5808. Runs commands related to Plastic Tube.
  5809. == CMD_USAGE_TUBE ==
  5810. Usage:
  5811. cm ^tube ^config -^u=<user> -^p=<password>
  5812. (Configures Unity VCS to use Plastic Tube with the specified user and
  5813. password.)
  5814. cm ^tube ^create <remoteuser>
  5815. (Creates the tube "remoteuser -> myuser". The user "myuser" allows to
  5816. "remoteuser" to connect to "myuser" server. Connections can be established
  5817. from "remoteuser" to "myuser". Only tubes from other users to the current
  5818. tube user can be created.)
  5819. cm ^tube ^remove <remoteuser>
  5820. (Removes the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".)
  5821. cm ^tube ^local
  5822. (Lists the local repositories shared in the local server and the users
  5823. that it is shared with.)
  5824. cm ^tube ^remote
  5825. (Lists the shared remote repositories that are shared with the current
  5826. tube user.)
  5827. cm ^tube ^share <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser> -^a=(^pull | ^push | ^pull,^push)
  5828. (Shares the local repository(s) with the remote user and sets the specified
  5829. access mode. Use a whitespace to separate repository specs.)
  5830. cm ^tube ^unshare <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser>
  5831. (Unshares the local repository(s) with the remote user. Use a whitespace to
  5832. separate repository specs.)
  5833. cm ^tube ^connect
  5834. (Connects the Unity VCS server to Plastic Tube.)
  5835. cm ^tube ^disconnect
  5836. (Disconnects the Unity VCS server from Plastic Tube.)
  5837. cm ^tube ^status
  5838. (Shows if the Unity VCS server is connected to Plastic Tube.)
  5839. Options:
  5840. -^u Tube user (the plasticscm.com user).
  5841. -^p User password.
  5842. -^a Sets the access mode.
  5843. rep_spec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5844. learn more about repository specs.)
  5845. == CMD_HELP_TUBE ==
  5846. Remarks:
  5847. Use the 'cm ^tube' command to manage Plastic Tube.
  5848. Examples:
  5849. cm ^tube ^config -^u=ruben@codicesoftware.com -^p=rubenpassword
  5850. cm ^tube ^create pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5851. ('pablo@codicesoftware.com' can connect to the current Plastic Tube user)
  5852. cm ^tube ^remove pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5853. cm ^tube ^local
  5854. cm ^tube ^remote
  5855. cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^pull,^push
  5856. cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 doc@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^push
  5857. cm ^tube ^unshare repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5858. cm ^tube ^connect
  5859. cm ^tube ^disconnect
  5860. cm ^tube ^status
  5861. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  5862. Undoes the checkout of an item.
  5863. == CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  5864. Usage:
  5865. cm ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [-^a | --^all] [--^symlink] [--^silent]
  5866. [--^keepchanges | -^k]
  5867. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  5868. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  5869. Options:
  5870. -^a | --^all Undoes all of the changes in the specified items. If
  5871. the item(s) were checked out, the checkout will be
  5872. reverted. If the item(s) were locally modified, the
  5873. modifications will be reverted.
  5874. --^symlink Applies the undocheckout operation to the link and not
  5875. to the target.
  5876. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5877. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  5878. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5879. specifies how the lines should start.
  5880. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5881. specifies how the lines should end.
  5882. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5883. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  5884. --^keepchanges | -^k Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
  5885. Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
  5886. changed with the same content on disk that it was.
  5887. This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
  5888. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5889. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5890. containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to
  5891. the current directory.
  5892. == CMD_HELP_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
  5893. Remarks:
  5894. If an item is checked out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
  5895. the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
  5896. out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
  5897. Requirements:
  5898. - The item must be under source code control.
  5899. - The item must be checked out.
  5900. Reading input from stdin:
  5901. The '^undocheckout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  5902. single dash "-".
  5903. Example:
  5904. cm ^undocheckout ^checkin -
  5905. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  5906. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo the checkout.
  5907. Example:
  5908. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undocheckout --^all -
  5909. (In Windows, undoes the checkout of all .c files in the workspace.)
  5910. Examples:
  5911. cm ^undocheckout .
  5912. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
  5913. cm ^undocheckout file1.txt file2.txt
  5914. cm ^unco c:\workspace\file.txt
  5915. (Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
  5916. cm ^unco -^a file1.txt
  5917. (Undoes checkouts or local modifications of 'file1.txt')
  5918. cm ^unco link --^symlink
  5919. (Applies the undocheckout operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
  5920. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^undocheckout -
  5921. (Undoes client changelist. The command above will list the paths in the
  5922. changelist named 'pending_to_review' and the path list will be redirected
  5923. to the input of the undocheckout command).
  5924. cm ^unco . --^machinereadable
  5925. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
  5926. simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
  5927. cm ^unco . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" \
  5928. --^fieldseparator=","
  5929. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
  5930. simplified, easier to parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
  5931. separating the fields, with the specified strings.)
  5932. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
  5933. Undoes non-changed checked out items.
  5934. == CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
  5935. Usage:
  5936. cm ^uncounchanged | ^unuc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  5937. [--^symlink] [--^silent]
  5938. Options:
  5939. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Undoes unchanged items recursively in the specified paths.
  5940. --^symlink Applies the uncounchanged operation to the link and not
  5941. to the target.
  5942. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5943. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5944. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5945. containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to current
  5946. directory.
  5947. == CMD_HELP_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
  5948. Remarks:
  5949. This command is applied from the root of the workspace recursively.
  5950. Reading input from stdin:
  5951. The '^uncounchanged' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  5952. single dash "-".
  5953. Example: cm ^uncounchanged -
  5954. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  5955. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which unchanged files to undo
  5956. the checkout.
  5957. Example:
  5958. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^uncounchanged -
  5959. (In Windows, undoes the checkout on all unchanged .c files in the
  5960. workspace.)
  5961. Examples:
  5962. cm ^uncounchanged . -^R
  5963. (Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the current directory.)
  5964. cm ^unuc /home/myuser/mywk/project/templates -^R
  5965. (Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the selected directory.)
  5966. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDELETE ==
  5967. Undeletes an item using a specific revision.
  5968. == CMD_USAGE_UNDELETE ==
  5969. Usage:
  5970. cm ^undelete <revspec> <path>
  5971. Options:
  5972. revspec Specification of the revision whose contents will
  5973. be loaded in the workspace. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5974. learn more about revision specs.)
  5975. path Restore path.
  5976. == CMD_HELP_UNDELETE ==
  5977. Remarks:
  5978. The item to undelete should not be already loaded in the workspace.
  5979. The '^undelete' operation is not supported for xlinks.
  5980. Example:
  5981. cm ^undelete ^revid:756 C:\mywks\src\foo.c
  5982. cm ^undelete ^itemid:68#^cs:2 C:\mywks\dir\myfile.pdf
  5983. cm ^undelete ^serverpath:/src#^br:/main C:\mywks\Dir
  5984. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5985. Undoes the changes on a path.
  5986. == CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5987. Usage:
  5988. cm ^undochange | ^unc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  5989. Options:
  5990. -^R | -^r | --^recursive Applies the operation recursively.
  5991. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5992. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5993. containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to
  5994. the current directory.
  5995. == CMD_HELP_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5996. Remarks:
  5997. If an item is checked out or modified but not checked in and you do not
  5998. want to check it in, you can undo the changes using this command. The item
  5999. will be updated to the contents it had before.
  6000. Reading input from stdin:
  6001. The '^undochange' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  6002. single dash "-".
  6003. Example:
  6004. cm ^undochange -
  6005. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  6006. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo changes.
  6007. Example:
  6008. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undochange -
  6009. (In Windows, undoes the changes of all .c files in the workspace.)
  6010. Examples:
  6011. cm ^unc .
  6012. (Undoes changes of the files on the current directory.)
  6013. cm ^undochange . -^R
  6014. (Undoes changes of the files recursively on the current directory.)
  6015. cm ^unc file1.txt "file 2.txt"
  6016. (Undoes changes of the selected files.)
  6017. cm ^unc c:\workspace\file.txt
  6018. (Undoes changes of the selected file.)
  6019. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDO ==
  6020. Undoes changes in a workspace.
  6021. == CMD_USAGE_UNDO ==
  6022. Usage:
  6023. cm ^undo [<path> [...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive] [<filter> [...]]
  6024. [--^silent | [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  6025. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>]
  6026. [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  6027. Options:
  6028. --^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
  6029. to the target.
  6030. -^r Executes the undo recursively.
  6031. --^silent Does not show any output.
  6032. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  6033. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  6034. how the lines should start.
  6035. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  6036. how the lines should end.
  6037. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  6038. how the fields should be separated.
  6039. path Path of the files or directories to apply the operation to.
  6040. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  6041. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
  6042. If no path is specified, by default the undo operation will take
  6043. all of the files in the current directory.
  6044. filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given paths. Use
  6045. a whitespace to separate filters. See the Filters section for
  6046. more information.
  6047. == CMD_HELP_UNDO ==
  6048. Remarks:
  6049. - If no path is specified, it will undo every change in the current
  6050. directory but not recursively.
  6051. - If one or more paths are specified, it will undo every change in the
  6052. specified paths but not recursively.
  6053. - If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
  6054. To undo all of the changes below a directory including changes affecting
  6055. the directory itself, run the following command:
  6056. cm ^undo dirpath -^r
  6057. If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
  6058. undone.
  6059. - The '^undo' command is dangerous because it undoes work irreversibly.
  6060. Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous
  6061. state of the files and directories affected by it.
  6062. - Consider the following scenario:
  6063. - /src
  6064. - file.txt
  6065. - code.cs
  6066. - /test
  6067. - test_a.py
  6068. - test_b.py
  6069. These commands are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
  6070. cm ^undo
  6071. cm ^undo *
  6072. cm ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
  6073. These commands are also equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
  6074. cm ^undo .
  6075. cm ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
  6076. Filters:
  6077. The paths can be filtered using one or more of the filters below. Each of
  6078. those filters refers to a type of change:
  6079. --^checkedout Selects checked-out files and directories.
  6080. --^unchanged Selects files whose content is unchanged.
  6081. --^changed Selects locally changed or checked-out files and directories.
  6082. --^deleted Selects deleted files and directories.
  6083. --^moved Selects moved files and directories.
  6084. --^added Selects added files and directories.
  6085. If the path matches one or more of the specified kinds of changes, those
  6086. types of changes will be undone on that said path.
  6087. For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file
  6088. is both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
  6089. If no filter is specified, all kinds of changes are undone.
  6090. Examples:
  6091. cm ^undo .
  6092. (Undoes all changes in the current directory.
  6093. It won't undo changes within its subdirectories.)
  6094. cm ^undo . -^r
  6095. (Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
  6096. from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
  6097. cm ^co file.txt
  6098. cm ^undo file.txt
  6099. (Undoes the checkout on 'file.txt'.)
  6100. cm ^undo c:\otherworkspace\file.txt
  6101. (Undoes changes in file 'file.txt' located in a workspace other than the
  6102. current one.)
  6103. ^echo ^content >> file.txt
  6104. cm ^undo file.txt
  6105. (Undoes the local change to 'file.txt'.)
  6106. cm ^undo src
  6107. (Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
  6108. cm ^undo src/*
  6109. (Undoes changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
  6110. affecting src.)
  6111. cm ^undo *.cs
  6112. (Undoes changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  6113. directory.)
  6114. cm ^undo *.cs -^r
  6115. (Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  6116. directory and every directory below it.)
  6117. cm ^co file1.txt file2.txt
  6118. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  6119. cm ^undo --^unchanged
  6120. (Undoes the checkout of unchanged 'file2.txt', ignoring locally changed
  6121. 'file1.txt'.)
  6122. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  6123. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  6124. cm ^co file1.txt
  6125. cm ^undo --^checkedout
  6126. (Undoes the changes in checked-out file 'file1.txt', ignoring 'file2.txt' as
  6127. it is not checked-out.)
  6128. cm ^add file.txt
  6129. cm ^undo file.txt
  6130. (Undo the add of 'file.txt' making it once again a private file.)
  6131. ^rm file1.txt
  6132. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  6133. cm ^add file3.txt
  6134. cm ^undo --^deleted --^added *
  6135. (Undoes the 'file1.txt' delete and 'file3.txt' add, ignoring the 'file2.txt'
  6136. change.)
  6137. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  6138. Undoes item locks on a server.
  6139. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  6140. Usage:
  6141. cm ^lock ^unlock <itemspec>[ ...] [--^remove]
  6142. Options:
  6143. --^remove Removes the locks completely for the specified items.
  6144. If this option is not specified, it only releases the
  6145. Locked status.
  6146. itemspec One or more item specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  6147. to learn more about itemspecs.)
  6148. == CMD_HELP_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  6149. Remarks:
  6150. - Only the administrator of the server can run the 'cm ^unlock --^remove'
  6151. command to delete locks.
  6152. - Only the administrator can release locks that belong to other users.
  6153. Users can release their own locks.
  6154. Examples:
  6155. cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep@DIGITALIS:8084
  6156. (Releases the lock for the item id 56 in the repo 'myrep@DIGITALIS'.)
  6157. cm ^lock ^unlock ^item:/home/user/workspace/foo.psd ^item:/home/user/workspace/bar.psd
  6158. (Releases the selected item locks.)
  6159. cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep ^itemid:89@myrep --^remove
  6160. (Removes the selected items locks.)
  6161. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_CREATE ==
  6162. Create item locks on a server.
  6163. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK_CREATE ==
  6164. Usage:
  6165. cm ^lock ^create | ^mk <branchspec> <itemspec>[ ...]
  6166. branchspec The branch where the locks will be created.
  6167. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branchspecs.)
  6168. itemspec One or more item specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  6169. to learn more about itemspecs.)
  6170. == CMD_HELP_LOCK_CREATE ==
  6171. Remarks:
  6172. - Only the administrator can create locks.
  6173. - All locks created with this command are created in Retained status.
  6174. - If the revision loaded in the specified branch (for each item) is the
  6175. same loaded in the lock destination branch (/main by default),
  6176. then no lock is created.
  6177. - The repspec or the branchspec must be the same of all the itemspecs
  6178. specified.
  6179. Examples:
  6180. cm ^lock ^create /main/task@myrep ^itemid:56@myrep
  6181. (Creates a lock for the item id 56 in the branch /main/task@myrep.)
  6182. cm ^lock ^create br:/main/task item:/workspace/foo.psd ^item:/workspace/bar.psd
  6183. (Creates a lock for the selected item in the branch /main/task.)
  6184. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UPDATE ==
  6185. Updates the workspace and downloads latest changes.
  6186. == CMD_USAGE_UPDATE ==
  6187. Usage:
  6188. cm ^update [<item_path> | --^last]
  6189. [--^changeset=<csetspec>] [--^cloaked] [--^dontmerge] [--^forced]
  6190. [--^ignorechanges] [--^override] [--^recursewk] [--^skipchangedcheck]
  6191. [--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  6192. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  6193. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  6194. [--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
  6195. Options:
  6196. --^changeset Updates the workspace to a specific changeset.
  6197. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  6198. changeset specs.)
  6199. --^cloaked Includes the cloaked items in the update operation.
  6200. If this option is not specified, those items that are
  6201. cloaked will be ignored in the operation.
  6202. --^dontmerge In case an update merge is required during the update
  6203. operation, does not perform it.
  6204. --^forced Forces updating items to the revision specified in
  6205. the selector.
  6206. --^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
  6207. shown if there are pending changes detected when
  6208. updating the workspace.
  6209. --^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
  6210. operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
  6211. --^override Overrides changed files outside Unity VCS control.
  6212. Their content will be overwritten with the server
  6213. content.
  6214. --^recursewk Updates all the workspaces found within the current
  6215. path. Useful to update all the workspaces contained
  6216. in a specific path.
  6217. --^skipchangedcheck Checks if there are local changes in your workspace
  6218. before starting. If you always checkout before
  6219. modifying a file, you can use this check and speed
  6220. up the operation.
  6221. --^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
  6222. --^verbose Shows additional information.
  6223. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  6224. It is possible to specify an output file.
  6225. --^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
  6226. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  6227. See the MSDN documentation at
  6228. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  6229. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  6230. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  6231. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  6232. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6233. specifies how the lines should start.
  6234. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6235. specifies how the lines should end.
  6236. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6237. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  6238. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
  6239. is redirected.
  6240. --^last Changes the workspace selector from a changeset
  6241. configuration or a label configuration to a branch
  6242. configuration before updating. The selector is changed
  6243. to the branch the changeset or label belongs to.
  6244. item_path Path to update. Use . to apply update to current directory.
  6245. If no path is specified, then the current workspace is
  6246. fully updated.
  6247. == CMD_HELP_UPDATE ==
  6248. Remarks:
  6249. The '^update' command only downloads needed files.
  6250. The command assumes recursive operation.
  6251. When the '--^last' option is used, it is not necessary to specify a path.
  6252. In this case, the workspace the current working directory belongs to will
  6253. be updated. (Remember that specifying this flag could cause the workspace
  6254. selector to be changed to a branch configuration if the selector was
  6255. previously pointing to a changeset or a label.)
  6256. Examples:
  6257. cm ^update
  6258. (Updates all in the current workspace.)
  6259. cm ^update .
  6260. (Updates current directory, and all children items.)
  6261. cm ^update . --^forced --^verbose
  6262. (Forces retrieval of all revisions.)
  6263. cm ^update --^last
  6264. cm ^update . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
  6265. (Updates current directory and prints the result in a simplified
  6266. easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified
  6267. strings.)
  6268. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_VERSION ==
  6269. Shows the current client version number.
  6270. == CMD_USAGE_VERSION ==
  6271. Usage:
  6272. cm ^version
  6273. == CMD_HELP_VERSION ==
  6274. Shows the current client version number.
  6275. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WHOAMI ==
  6276. Shows the current Unity VCS user.
  6277. == CMD_USAGE_WHOAMI ==
  6278. Usage:
  6279. cm ^whoami
  6280. == CMD_HELP_WHOAMI ==
  6281. Shows the current Unity VCS user.
  6282. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE ==
  6283. Allows the user to manage workspaces.
  6284. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE ==
  6285. Usage:
  6286. cm ^workspace | ^wk <command> [options]
  6287. Commands:
  6288. - ^list | ^ls
  6289. - ^create | ^mk
  6290. - ^delete | ^rm
  6291. - ^move | ^mv
  6292. - ^rename
  6293. To get more information about each command run:
  6294. cm ^workspace <command> --^usage
  6295. cm ^workspace <command> --^help
  6296. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE ==
  6297. Examples:
  6298. cm ^workspace ^create myWorkspace wk_path
  6299. cm ^workspace ^list
  6300. cm ^workspace ^delete myWorkspace
  6301. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  6302. Creates a new workspace.
  6303. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  6304. Usage:
  6305. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <rep_spec>
  6306. [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [<rep_spec>]
  6307. [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [--^selector[=<selector_file>]
  6308. (Creates a new workspace.)
  6309. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> --^dynamic --^tree=[<tree>]
  6310. (Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still experimental, and it's
  6311. only available for Windows.)
  6312. Options:
  6313. --^selector Edits a selector for the new workspace.
  6314. If a selector file is specified, then sets the selector
  6315. for the new workspace from the specified file.
  6316. --^dynamic Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still
  6317. experimental, and it's only available for Windows.
  6318. Specifying this flag requires using the --^tree parameter.
  6319. --^tree Used with the '--^dynamic' flag, specifies the initial
  6320. point the dynamic workspace is going to load. It can
  6321. either be a branch, changeset, or label specification.
  6322. The workspace will later on use the repository in the
  6323. spec. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  6324. wk_name The new workspace name.
  6325. wk_path Path of the new workspace.
  6326. rep_spec Creates the new workspace with the specified repository.
  6327. Repository specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  6328. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  6329. Remarks:
  6330. - A workspace is a view of the repository mapped to the local filesystem.
  6331. The workspace selector defines the rules that specify workspace content.
  6332. Use 'cm ^showselector' to display a workspace selector or 'cm ^setselector'
  6333. to modify it.
  6334. - If neither rep_spec nor '--^selector' is specified, then the workspace
  6335. will automatically be configured to use the first repository
  6336. (alphabetically) of the server configured in the client.conf file.
  6337. - The dynamic workspaces is a experimental feature (Windows only), and it
  6338. requires the plasticfs.exe program running.
  6339. Examples:
  6340. cm ^workspace ^create mycode
  6341. cm ^wk ^mk mycode
  6342. (Creates a 'mycode' workspace pointing to the repository with the same name.
  6343. The workspace directory will be created under the current directory.)
  6344. cm ^wk ^mk mycode@localhost:8084
  6345. cm ^wk ^mk mycode@myorganization@cloud
  6346. (Creates a 'mycode' workspace as before, but you can specify different repository server.)
  6347. cm ^workspace ^create myworkspace c:\workspace
  6348. cm ^wk ^mk myworkspace /home/john/plastic_view
  6349. (Creates 'myworkspace' workspace in Windows and in Linux respectively.)
  6350. cm ^wk mywktest c:\wks\wktest --^selector=myselector.txt
  6351. (Creates 'mywktest' workspace using the selector in 'myselector.txt' file.)
  6352. cm ^wk mywkprj c:\wks\wkprj myrep@^repserver:localhost:8084
  6353. (Creates 'mywkprj' workspace with the selected repository.)
  6354. cm ^wk mywkprj c:\dynwks\mywkprj --^dynamic --^tree=^br:/main@myrep@localhost:8084
  6355. (Creates dynamic 'mywkprj' workspace with the 'myrep@localhost:8084'
  6356. repository, pointing to '^br:/main' the first time it gets mounted.)
  6357. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  6358. Deletes a workspace.
  6359. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  6360. Usage:
  6361. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^delete | ^rm [<wk_path> | <wkspec>] [--^keepmetadata]
  6362. Options:
  6363. --^keepmetadata Does not delete the metadata files in the .plastic
  6364. folder.
  6365. wk_path Path of the workspace to be deleted.
  6366. wkspec Specification of the workspace to delete. (Use
  6367. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  6368. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  6369. Remarks:
  6370. This command deletes a workspace, specified by path or spec.
  6371. If no arguments are specified, current workspace will be assumed.
  6372. Examples:
  6373. cm ^workspace ^delete
  6374. (Removes current workspace.)
  6375. cm ^wk ^delete c:\workspace
  6376. cm ^workspace rm /home/danipen/wks
  6377. cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace
  6378. cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace@DIGITALIS
  6379. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  6380. Lists workspaces.
  6381. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  6382. Usage:
  6383. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
  6384. Options:
  6385. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  6386. Remarks for more info.
  6387. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  6388. Remarks:
  6389. Output format parameters (--^format option):
  6390. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  6391. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  6392. {0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
  6393. {1} | {^machine} Client machine name.
  6394. {2} | {^path} Workspace path.
  6395. {3} | {^wkid} Workspace unique identifier.
  6396. {4} | {^wkspec} Workspace specification using the format:
  6397. 'wkname@machine'.
  6398. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  6399. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  6400. Examples:
  6401. cm ^wk
  6402. (Lists all workspaces.)
  6403. cm ^workspace ^list --^format={0}#{3,40}
  6404. cm ^workspace ^list --^format={^wkname}#{^wkid,40}
  6405. (Lists all workspaces and shows the workspace name, a # symbol and the
  6406. workspace GUID field in 40 spaces, aligned to left.)
  6407. cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {0} in path {2}"
  6408. cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {^wkname} in path {^path}"
  6409. (Lists all workspaces and shows result as formatted strings.)
  6410. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  6411. Moves a workspace.
  6412. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  6413. Usage:
  6414. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^move | ^mv [<wkspec>] <new_path>
  6415. Options:
  6416. wkspec Specification of the workspace to move. (Use
  6417. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  6418. new_path Workspace will be moved to here.
  6419. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  6420. Remarks:
  6421. This command allows users to move a workspace to another location on disk.
  6422. Examples:
  6423. cm ^workspace ^move myWorkspace \new\workspaceDirectory
  6424. (Moves 'myWorkspace' to the specified location.)
  6425. cm ^wk ^mv c:\users\maria\wkspaces\newlocation
  6426. (Moves the current workspace to the new location.)
  6427. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  6428. Renames a workspace.
  6429. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  6430. Usage:
  6431. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^rename [<wk_name>] <new_name>
  6432. Options:
  6433. wk_name Workspace to rename.
  6434. new_name New name for the workspace.
  6435. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  6436. Remarks:
  6437. This command renames a workspace.
  6438. If no workspace name is supplied, the current workspace will be used.
  6439. Examples:
  6440. cm ^workspace ^rename mywk1 wk2
  6441. (Renames the workspace 'mywk1' to 'wk2'.)
  6442. cm ^wk ^rename newname
  6443. (Renames the current workspace to 'newname'.)
  6444. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  6445. Shows changes in the workspace.
  6446. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  6447. Usage:
  6448. cm ^status [<wk_path>] [--^changelist[=<name>] | --^changelists] [--^cutignored]
  6449. [ --^header] [ --^noheader] [ --^nomergesinfo] [ --^head]
  6450. [--^short] [--^symlink] [ --^dirwithchanges] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
  6451. [--^encoding=<name>] [ --^wrp | --^wkrootrelativepaths]
  6452. [--^fullpaths | --^fp] [<legacy_options>] [<search_types>[ ...]]
  6453. [--^pretty]
  6454. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=sep]
  6455. [--^endlineseparator=sep] [--^fieldseparator=sep]]
  6456. Options:
  6457. --^changelist Shows changes in the selected changelist.
  6458. --^changelists Shows changes grouped in client changelists.
  6459. --^cutignored Skips the contents of ignored directories.
  6460. Requires the '--^ignored' search type. See the Search
  6461. types section for more information.
  6462. --^header Only prints the workspace status.
  6463. --^noheader Only prints the modified item search result.
  6464. --^nomergesinfo Doesn't print the merge info for changes.
  6465. --^head Prints the status of the last changeset on the branch.
  6466. --^short Lists only paths that contains changes.
  6467. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  6468. target.
  6469. --^dirwithchanges Shows directories that contain changes inside them
  6470. (added, moved, removed items inside).
  6471. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  6472. It is possible to specify an output file.
  6473. --^pretty Prints workspace changes in a nice table format.
  6474. --^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
  6475. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  6476. See the MSDN documentation at
  6477. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  6478. to get the table of supported encodings and its format
  6479. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  6480. --^wrp Print workspace root relative paths instead of
  6481. current directory relative paths.
  6482. --^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing absolute paths, overriding any other
  6483. path printing setting.
  6484. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  6485. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6486. specifies how the lines should start.
  6487. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6488. specifies how the lines should end.
  6489. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  6490. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  6491. --^iscochanged Shows whether contents of a checked-out file have
  6492. changed or not. This flag is only available with
  6493. "--^compact", "--^xml" and "--^machinereadable" options.
  6494. If this flag is not set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
  6495. "--^machinereadable" options will show just "^CO"
  6496. status for a checked-out file with its contents
  6497. changed.
  6498. If this flag is set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
  6499. "--^machinereadable" options will show "^CO+CH" status
  6500. for a checked-out file with its contents changed.
  6501. wk_path Path of the workspace where the search will be
  6502. performed.
  6503. Legacy options:
  6504. --^cset Prints the workspace status in the legacy format.
  6505. --^compact Prints the workspace status and changelists in the
  6506. legacy format.
  6507. --^noheaders When used in conjunction with the '--^compact' flag, the
  6508. changelist headers will not be printed. (Does not apply
  6509. to the new changelists format.)
  6510. Search types:
  6511. --^added Prints added items.
  6512. --^checkout Prints checkedout items.
  6513. --^changed Prints changed items.
  6514. --^copied Prints copied items.
  6515. --^replaced Prints replaced items.
  6516. --^deleted Prints deleted items.
  6517. --^localdeleted Prints locally deleted items.
  6518. --^moved Prints moved items.
  6519. --^localmoved Prints locally moved items.
  6520. --^percentofsimilarity=<value> Percent of similarity between two files in
  6521. order to consider them the same item. Used
  6522. in the locally moved search. Its default
  6523. value is 20%.
  6524. --^txtsameext Only those text files that have the same
  6525. extension will be taken into account by the
  6526. similarity content matching process during
  6527. the moved items search. By default, any
  6528. text file will be processed.
  6529. --^binanyext Any binary file will be taken into account
  6530. by the similarity content matching process
  6531. during the moved items search. By default,
  6532. only those binary files that have the same
  6533. extension will be processed.
  6534. --^private Prints non controlled items.
  6535. --^ignored Prints ignored items.
  6536. --^hiddenchanged Prints hidden changed items. (Includes
  6537. '--^changed')
  6538. --^cloaked Prints cloaked items.
  6539. --^controlledchanged This flag substitutes the following options:
  6540. '--^added', '--^checkout', '--^copied',
  6541. '--^replaced', '--^deleted', '--^moved'.
  6542. --^all This flag replaces the following parameters:
  6543. '--^controlledchanged', '--^changed',
  6544. '--^localdeleted', '--^localmoved', '--^private'.
  6545. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  6546. Remarks:
  6547. The '^status' command prints the loaded changeset on a workspace and gets
  6548. the changed elements inside the workspace.
  6549. This command can be used to show the pending changes in a workspace; the
  6550. type of changes that can be searched can be modified by using the command
  6551. parameters. By default, all changes are displayed, be they controlled
  6552. or local.
  6553. The percent of similarity parameter '--^percentofsimilarity' (-^p) is used
  6554. by the locally moved search to decide if two elements are the same item.
  6555. The default value is 20% but it can be adjusted.
  6556. It is possible to show workspace changes grouped by client changelists.
  6557. The '^default' changelist includes the changes that are not included in
  6558. other changelists. That being said, the changes the default changelist
  6559. will show depends on the search types flags specified.
  6560. Showing changes grouped by changelists requires showing controlled
  6561. changes too (items with status equal to '^added', '^checkout', '^copied',
  6562. '^replaced', '^deleted', or '^moved'). So, the '--^controlledchanged' option
  6563. will be automatically enabled when changelists are shown.
  6564. The default encoding for XML output is utf-8.
  6565. By default, this command will print current directory relative paths,
  6566. unless the '--^machinereadable' or '--^short' flags are specified. If
  6567. any of them are specified, the command will print absolute paths.
  6568. If '--^xml' flag is specified, workspace root relative paths will
  6569. be printed (unless the '--^fp' flag is also specified, printing
  6570. absolute paths instead).
  6571. Examples:
  6572. cm ^status
  6573. (Prints the working changeset and also all item types changed in the
  6574. workspace, except the ignored ones.)
  6575. cm ^status --^controlledchanged
  6576. (Prints the working changeset and also the items that are checkedout, added,
  6577. copied, replaced, deleted, and moved.)
  6578. cm ^status --^added
  6579. (Prints only the working changeset and the added items inside the workspace.)
  6580. cm ^status c:\workspaceLocation\code\client --^added
  6581. (Prints the working changeset and the added items under the specified path
  6582. recursively.)
  6583. cm ^status --^changelists
  6584. cm ^status --^changelist
  6585. (Shows all the workspace changes grouped by client changelists.)
  6586. cm ^status --^changelist=pending_to_review
  6587. (Shows the changes on the changelist named 'pending_to_review'.)
  6588. cm ^status --^changelist=default --^private
  6589. (Shows the changes in the 'default' changelist, showing private items, along
  6590. with items with controlled changes, if any.)
  6591. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
  6592. (Checkins the changes in the changelist 'pending_to_review'.)
  6593. cm ^status C:\workspaceLocation --^xml=output.xml
  6594. (Gets the status information in XML format and using utf-8 in the file
  6595. output.xml.)
  6596. cm ^status --^ignored
  6597. (Shows all ignored items.)
  6598. cm ^status --^ignored --^cutignored
  6599. (Shows ignored files whose parent directory is not ignored and ignored
  6600. directories but not their contents.)
  6601. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_XLINK ==
  6602. Creates, edits, or displays details of an Xlink.
  6603. == CMD_USAGE_XLINK ==
  6604. Usage:
  6605. cm ^xlink [-^w] [-^rs] <xlink_path> / (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec)>
  6606. [<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
  6607. (Creates an Xlink.)
  6608. cm ^xlink [-^rs] <xlink_path> /<relative_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
  6609. [<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
  6610. (Creates a readonly partial Xlink pointing to /<relative_path> instead of
  6611. the default root / .)
  6612. cm ^xlink -^e <xlink_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
  6613. (Edits an Xlink to change the target specification.)
  6614. cm ^xlink -^s|--^show <xlink_path>
  6615. (Shows the Xlink information including the expansion rules.)
  6616. cm ^xlink -^ar|--^addrules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
  6617. (Adds the given expansion rules to the Xlink.)
  6618. cm ^xlink -^dr|--^deleterules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
  6619. (Removes the given expansion rules from the Xlink.)
  6620. Options:
  6621. -^e Edits an existing Xlink to change the target changeset
  6622. specification.
  6623. -^s | --^show Shows information about the selected Xlink.
  6624. -^ar | --^addrules Adds one or more expansion rules to the selected Xlink.
  6625. -^dr | --^deleterules Deletes one or more expansion rules from the selected
  6626. Xlink.
  6627. -^w Indicates that the Xlink is writable. This means that
  6628. the contents of the target repository can be modified
  6629. through branch autoexpansion.
  6630. -^rs Relative server. This option allows creating a relative
  6631. Xlink that is independent of the repository server. This
  6632. way, Xlinks created in replicated repositories in
  6633. different servers will be automatically identified.
  6634. expansion_rules To specify one or more expansion rule. Each expansion
  6635. rule is a pair branch-target branch:
  6636. ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6637. xlink_path This is the directory in the current workspace where
  6638. the linked repository will be mounted (when creating an
  6639. Xlink) or is mounted (when editing an Xlink).
  6640. csetspec The full target changeset specification in the remote
  6641. repository.
  6642. This determines what version and branch is loaded in the
  6643. workspace for the linked repository.
  6644. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  6645. specs.)
  6646. lbspec The full label specification in the remote repository.
  6647. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  6648. specs.)
  6649. brspec The full branch specification in the remote repository.
  6650. This uses the current changeset where the specified
  6651. branch is pointing to. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  6652. learn more about branch specs.)
  6653. == CMD_HELP_XLINK ==
  6654. Remarks:
  6655. This command creates an Xlink to a given changeset. By default, a read-only
  6656. Xlink is created. This means that the contents loaded in the workspace
  6657. inside the Xlink cannot be modified. To be able to make changes in the
  6658. Xlinked content, create a writable Xlink instead (using the '-^w' option).
  6659. It is possible to use a simplified syntax of the command when editing the
  6660. target changeset of an Xlink. This way, the only required parameter is the
  6661. new target changeset. The rest of parameters of the Xlink will not be
  6662. modified.
  6663. Branch auto-expansion:
  6664. When a change is made in any writable-xlinked repositories ('-^w' option), a
  6665. new branch needs to be created in the target repository. The name of the
  6666. new branch is based on the checkout branch defined in the top-level
  6667. repository. To determine the name of the branch to use, these rules apply:
  6668. 1) A check is made to see if a branch with the same full name exists
  6669. in the target repository:
  6670. - If it exists, this is used as the checkout branch.
  6671. - If it does not exist, the branch name is built this way:
  6672. - Name of the branch of the target Xlinked changeset + short name of
  6673. the checkout branch (last part).
  6674. - If this branch exists, it is used as the checkout branch.
  6675. - Otherwise, the branch is created and the branch base is set to the
  6676. Xlinked changeset.
  6677. 2) A new version of the Xlink is created in the branch on the parent
  6678. repository pointing to the new changeset in the Xlinked repository.
  6679. Finally, the complete Xlink structure is kept up to date with the latest
  6680. changes in the right versions.
  6681. Examples:
  6682. cm ^xlink code\firstrepo / 1@first@localhost:8084
  6683. (Creates an Xlink in folder 'firstrepo' in the current workspace where the
  6684. changeset '1' in the repository 'first' will be mounted.)
  6685. cm ^xlink opengl\include /includes/opengl 1627@includes@localhost:8087
  6686. (Creates a readonly partial Xlink in directory 'opengl\include' in the
  6687. current workspace where the path '/includes/opengl' in changeset '1627' in
  6688. the repository 'includes' will be mounted as root. It means that whatever
  6689. is inside '/includes/opengl' will be mounted in 'opengl\include' while the
  6690. rest of the repository will be ignored.)
  6691. cm ^xlink -^w -^rs code\secondrepo / ^lb:LB001@second@localhost:8084
  6692. (Creates a writable and relative Xlink in folder 'secondrepo' in the
  6693. current workspace where the label 'LB001' in the repository 'second' will
  6694. be mounted.)
  6695. cm ^xlink code\thirdrepo / 3@third@localhost:8087 ^br:/main-^br:/main/scm003
  6696. (Creates an Xlink in folder 'thirdrepo' in the current workspace where the
  6697. changeset '3' in the repository 'third' will be mounted.)
  6698. cm ^xlink -^e code\secondrepo ^br:/main/task1234@second@localhost:8084
  6699. (Edits the Xlink 'code\secondrepo' to change the target repository by
  6700. linking the branch 'main/task1234' in the repository 'second'.)
  6701. cm ^xlink --^show code\thirdrepo
  6702. (Shows information of the Xlink 'code\thirdrepo' including its expansion
  6703. rules if exist).
  6704. cm ^xlink -^ar code\secondrepo ^br:/main-^br:/main/develop ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6705. (Adds two expansion rules to the xlink 'code\secondrepo'.)
  6706. cm ^xlink -^dr code\secondrepo ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6707. (Deletes the expansion rule from the xlink 'code\secondrepo').
  6708. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
  6709. Allows to implement autocomplete suggestions in a line at the cursor position.
  6710. == CMD_USAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
  6711. Usage:
  6712. cm ^autocomplete ^install
  6713. (Installs 'cm' command completion in the shell.)
  6714. cm ^autocomplete ^uninstall
  6715. (Uninstalls 'cm' command completion from the shell.)
  6716. cm ^autocomplete --^line <shell_line> --^position <cursor_position>
  6717. (Returns autocomplete suggestions for 'shell_line' to be inserted at
  6718. 'cursor_position'.)
  6719. Options:
  6720. shell_line The line the user has written into the shell when the
  6721. autocompletion was requested.
  6722. In Bash, it is at the COMP_LINE environment variable.
  6723. In PowerShell, it is at the $wordToComplete variable.
  6724. cursor_position The position of the cursor when the autocompletion was
  6725. requested.
  6726. In Bash, it is at the COMP_POINT environment variable.
  6727. In PowerShell, it is at the $cursorPosition variable.
  6728. == CMD_HELP_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
  6729. Remarks:
  6730. This command is not intended to be used by the final user,
  6731. but it is documented in case it is needed to extend autocompletion
  6732. support for the shell of choice.
  6733. Examples:
  6734. cm ^autocomplete --^line "cm ^show" --^position 7
  6735. (Shows a list of commands starting with "show". In this case:
  6736. showcommands, showfindobjects, showacl, showowner, showpermissions,
  6737. showselector.)
  6738. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_API ==
  6739. Starts a local HTTP server that listens for REST API requests.
  6740. == CMD_USAGE_API ==
  6741. Usage:
  6742. cm ^api [(-^p|--^port)=<portnumber>] [(-^r|--^remote)]
  6743. Options:
  6744. -^p | --^port Tells the server to listen on port <portnumber>
  6745. instead of 9090.
  6746. -^r | --^remote Allows incoming remote connections. This means
  6747. connections that come from other hosts instead of the
  6748. local one.
  6749. == CMD_HELP_API ==
  6750. Remarks:
  6751. The cm ^api command allows programmers to perform Unity VCS client operations
  6752. in their machines.
  6753. Read the Unity VCS API Guide for more information:
  6754. https://www.plasticscm.com/documentation/restapi/plastic-scm-version-control-rest-api-guide
  6755. By default, the API listens for local connections only, on port 9090.
  6756. Press the Enter key to stop the server.
  6757. Examples:
  6758. cm ^api
  6759. (Starts the API listening on port 9090, local connections only.)
  6760. cm ^api -^r
  6761. (Starts the API listening on port 9090, allowing any incoming connection.)
  6762. cm ^api --^port=15000 -^r
  6763. (Starts the API listening on port 15000, allowing any incoming connection.)
  6764. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
  6765. Configures the Unity VCS client for the current machine user to work with a default server.
  6766. == CMD_USAGE_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
  6767. Usage:
  6768. cm ^configure [--^language=<language> --^workingmode=<mode> [AuthParameters]
  6769. --^server=<server> [--^port=<port>]] [--^clientconf=<clientconfpath>]
  6770. Options:
  6771. --^language Available languages. See remarks for more info.
  6772. --^workingmode Available users/security working modes. See remarks for more info.
  6773. --^server Unity VCS server IP / address.
  6774. --^port Unity VCS server port (optional for Cloud servers).
  6775. --^clientconf File path used to create the configuration file (optional).
  6776. AuthParameters Authentication parameters. See Remarks for more info.
  6777. == CMD_HELP_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
  6778. Remarks:
  6779. The cm ^configure command cannot be used on Cloud Edition or DVCS Edition of Unity VCS.
  6780. Use 'plastic --configure' instead.
  6781. Languages:
  6782. - en (English)
  6783. - es (Spanish)
  6784. Working modes:
  6785. - NameWorkingMode (Name)
  6786. - NameIDWorkingMode (Name + ID)
  6787. - LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
  6788. - ADWorkingMode (Active Directory)
  6789. - UPWorkingMode (User and password)
  6790. - SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
  6791. Client configuration:
  6792. If this parameter is not specified, the default directory for
  6793. 'client.conf' file would be '%LocalAppData%\plastic4'
  6794. on Windows or '$HOME/.plastic4' on linux/macOS.
  6795. AuthParameters:
  6796. - ^LDAPWorkingMode and ^UPWorkingMode
  6797. - --^user=<user>
  6798. - --^password=<password>
  6799. - ^SSOWorkingMode
  6800. - --^user=<user>
  6801. - --^token=<token>
  6802. Examples:
  6803. cm ^configure
  6804. (runs the interactive Unity VCS client configuration command)
  6805. cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^user=^jack --^password=^01234 \
  6806. --^server=^plastic.mymachine.com --^port=^8084
  6807. (configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
  6808. configuration file in the default directory)
  6809. cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^NameWorkingMode --^server=^plastic.mymachine.com \
  6810. --^port=^8084 --^clientconf=^clientconf_exp.conf
  6811. (configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
  6812. configuration file in the specified path)
  6813. cm ^configure --^clientconf=c:/path/to/myclient.conf
  6814. (Specified path will be used to create the client configuration file)
  6815. cm ^configure --^clientconf=myclient.conf
  6816. (File myclient.conf inside default config directory will be used)
  6817. cm ^configure --^clientconf=c:/exisitingDirectory
  6818. (Default filename, client.conf, in specified directory will be used)
  6819. configuration file in the specified path)
  6820. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE ==
  6821. Allows the user to inspect, register and execute repository purges. Purged revisions are no longer accessible for that repository, thus helping to free space.
  6822. Warning: Purge actions are irreversible. Once they are executed, you will not be able to load purged revisions anymore—either by switching a workspace or when showing branch or changeset differences. Use this under your own responsibility.
  6823. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE ==
  6824. Usage:
  6825. cm ^purge <command> [options]
  6826. Commands:
  6827. - ^register
  6828. - ^execute
  6829. - ^show
  6830. - ^history
  6831. - ^unregister
  6832. To get more information about each command run:
  6833. cm ^purge <command> --^usage
  6834. cm ^purge <command> --^help
  6835. == CMD_HELP_PURGE ==
  6836. Examples:
  6837. cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM" --^repository=timemachine
  6838. (registers a purge action for the 'timemachine' repository)
  6839. cm ^purge ^history
  6840. (lists the ID and status of all the purge actions ever registerd in the server)
  6841. cm ^purge ^show 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817 --^verbose
  6842. (shows in detail the purge action metadata for a given ID,
  6843. including items and revisions affected by the purge)
  6844. cm ^purge ^execute 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
  6845. (starts a previously registered purge action)
  6846. cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
  6847. (purges that were not executed can be deleted from the registry)
  6848. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_REGISTER ==
  6849. Computes and registers a purge action.
  6850. File revisions older than the selected date(s) would be considered for purging and, as a rule, we will keep at least a revision in every branch head and labeled revisions. You can use the "cm ^purge ^show" command to check the selected revisions prior to run it with the "cm ^purge ^execute" command.
  6851. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE_REGISTER ==
  6852. Usage:
  6853. cm ^purge ^register (<extension> <before_date>)... [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  6854. Options:
  6855. --^repository Repository where the purge is intended to be applied.
  6856. It is not necessary within a workspace path but to pick a different one.
  6857. extension Extension of the file type to be purged. Note that revisions of renamed
  6858. items will also be considered for its removal.
  6859. before_date Only revisions older than this date will be considered for its removal.
  6860. == CMD_HELP_PURGE_REGISTER ==
  6861. Examples:
  6862. cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM"
  6863. (registers a purge action over revisions of Matroska files created before a certain date)
  6864. cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "6:00 AM"
  6865. (you can specify just the date or just the time)
  6866. cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "6:00Z"
  6867. (you can specify the time in UTC instead of local time)
  6868. cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM" --^repository=timemachine
  6869. (you can specify a different repository to register the purge)
  6870. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
  6871. Executes a purge action previously registered.
  6872. Warning: Purge actions are irreversible. Once they are executed, you will not be able to load purged revisions anymore—either by switching a workspace or when showing branch or changeset differences. Use this under your own responsibility.
  6873. Please ensure you check the file history to confirm which revisions/changesets are not relevant. Do not hesitate to use the cm ^purge ^show command prior to the purge execution in order to verify no unexpected revision is selected for its removal.
  6874. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
  6875. Usage:
  6876. cm ^purge ^execute <purge_guid> [--^server=<server>]
  6877. Options:
  6878. --^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
  6879. will be executed.
  6880. purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
  6881. == CMD_HELP_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
  6882. Examples:
  6883. cm ^purge ^execute be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13
  6884. (Executes a purge given its ID).
  6885. cm ^purge ^execute be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^server=myorg@cloud
  6886. (You can specify a precise server if you need it).
  6887. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_SHOW ==
  6888. Provides a report of the purge status and contents.
  6889. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE_SHOW ==
  6890. Usage:
  6891. cm ^purge ^show <purge_guid> [--^verbose | --^server=<server>]
  6892. Options:
  6893. --^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
  6894. will be queried.
  6895. --^verbose Extends the report to include the items and revisions
  6896. involved in the purge.
  6897. purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
  6898. == CMD_HELP_PURGE_SHOW ==
  6899. Examples:
  6900. cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13
  6901. (Provides a brief report of the purge status)
  6902. cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^verbose
  6903. (Provides additional information per purged extension,
  6904. including items and revisions)
  6905. cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^server=myorg@cloud
  6906. (You can specify a different server if you wish)
  6907. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_HISTORY ==
  6908. Allows the user to check the state of all the purges registed in the server at some point.
  6909. Also, it is useful to get information about them that are preserved for query purposes, such as the author, the date of execution or the storage size and the types affected by the purge.
  6910. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE_HISTORY ==
  6911. Usage:
  6912. cm ^purge ^history [--^verbose | --^server=<server>]
  6913. [--^sort=(^desc|^asc)]
  6914. [--^skip=<skip> | --^limit=<limit>]
  6915. Options:
  6916. --^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
  6917. will be queried.
  6918. --^verbose By default, only the ID and the status is shown per
  6919. purge. This option includes more detailed information.
  6920. --^sort Specifies an ordering for purges shown in the result.
  6921. It can be descending (^desc) or ascending (^asc).
  6922. --^skip Specifies a number of entries to skip so they are not
  6923. reflected in the result.
  6924. --^limit Specifies the maximum number of entries to show at once.
  6925. == CMD_HELP_PURGE_HISTORY ==
  6926. Examples:
  6927. cm ^purge ^history
  6928. (Shows the ID and status for all purges ever registered in the server).
  6929. cm ^purge ^history --^server=stoltz@cloud
  6930. (You can override the server to use different one if needed).
  6931. cm ^purge ^history --^verbose
  6932. (Includes more detailed data associated to the shown purges).
  6933. cm ^purge ^history --^sort=^asc
  6934. (Shows the history starting from the oldest purges).
  6935. cm ^purge ^history --^skip=0 --^limit=20
  6936. cm ^purge ^history --^skip=20 --^limit=20
  6937. cm ^purge ^history --^skip=40 --^limit=20
  6938. (Instead of showing everything at once, you can paginate results).
  6939. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
  6940. Purge actions can be deleted from the registry if you decide to not run them.
  6941. Remember that it is not possible to unregister purges that were already executed.
  6942. == CMD_USAGE_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
  6943. Usage:
  6944. cm ^purge ^unregister <purge_guid> [--^server=<server>]
  6945. Options:
  6946. --^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
  6947. will be queried.
  6948. purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
  6949. == CMD_HELP_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
  6950. Examples:
  6951. cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
  6952. (purges that were not executed can be deleted from the registry)
  6953. cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817 --^server=myorg@cloud
  6954. (you can specify a different server to unregister the purge)